JP7164241B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Regarding game machines, Patent Document 1, for example, describes that a pachinko game machine starts an operation in an initial state when recovering from a power failure, regardless of the operation before the power was cut off.

JP 2010-194337 A

By the way, when the gaming machine recovers from a power-off state, there are cases where a specific recovery is performed, which involves initialization of information stored in the storage means for storing information. In this case, unless notification accompanying the specific return is made, it may not be recognized that the gaming machine has made the specific return from the power-off state.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to recognize that a game machine has made a specific recovery from a power-off state.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes storage means (for example, the RAM 203) for storing the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and effect means (for example, the movable accessory 115) for executing the effect. A first image (for example, a stage image 61) is displayed when the gaming machine is restored from a power-off state, and then a different image from the first image is displayed. and a display means (for example, an image display section 114) for displaying a second image (for example, a customer waiting image 65), wherein the return includes information stored in the storage means. There is a specific return with initialization (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)), and both the first image and the second image are displayed before the gaming machine enters the power-off state. 59-2 (5)) to a production position (for example, the position shown in 59-2 (6)) and can emit light. It has a first effect means (for example, movable accessory 115) and a second effect means (for example, speaker 156) capable of outputting sound, and the effect control means controls the specific return (for example, initialization return ) is performed, the first effect means (e.g., movable accessory 115) is moved from the initial position to the effect position, and an initial operation (e.g., initial operation (e.g., initial initialization test operation processing and initialization return processing) can be performed a first number of times (for example, once), and a predetermined notification sound (for example, "initialized" sound) is generated by the second effect means ( For example, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to perform an initial notification (eg, initialization notification processing) output to a speaker 156) a second number of times (eg, three times), which is larger than the first number of times. .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given for illustrative purposes when describing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to recognize that the gaming machine has been specifically restored from the power-off state.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display provided at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows operation|movement of the basic process by a game control part. It is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a starting opening switch process. 4 is a flowchart showing the details of gate switch processing; It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flow chart showing the contents of normal design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of the random number used in the present embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot pattern random number, (c ) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a winning random number. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a) is. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the effect control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a reserved storage area, (b) is a block showing the configuration of each of the storage unit shown in (a) It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the structure of a command, where (a) is a diagram showing the data structure of the command, and (b) is a diagram showing the structure of the command as a bit string; 3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in RAM; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing details of output processing by an output control unit; It is a flow chart which shows operation of a production control part, (a) is a figure showing main processing, and (b) is a figure showing interruption processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing; 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 27; 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 27; FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 27; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production|presentation button processing. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in the main control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear process in the main control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in the main-control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated while settings are being changed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 2nd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 3rd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 4th modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the fluctuation production|presentation pattern table used in fluctuation|variation production pattern selection (S2813) in the production|presentation selection process of FIG.28(b). It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the fluctuation production|presentation pattern table used in fluctuation|variation production pattern selection (S2813) in the production|presentation selection process of FIG.28(b). It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit and the performance control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit and the performance control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit and the performance control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit and the performance control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit and the performance control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from a power-off state. The period from when the pachinko machine power-off state is resolved until the customer waiting image is displayed in the processing example 1, and the customer waiting image is displayed after the pachinko gaming machine power-off state is resolved in the processing example 2. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a period until the It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a modification of example 6 of variable effect; It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins. This pachinko game machine 100 comprises a game board 110 on which game balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110.例文帳に追加The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150 .

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing a game with game balls, a rail member 112 forming a passage for the game balls shot from below to rise to an upper position of the game area 111, and a game board 110. A guide member 113 for guiding game balls is provided on the right side of the area 111 .
In this embodiment, an image display section 114 for displaying various images for presentation is provided at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative symbols for informing the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol fluctuation result) as the player progresses the game, An effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using a hold display, which will be described later, is displayed.
In addition, the front surface of the game board 110 is provided with three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The three movable accessories 115 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. When the three movable accessories 115 are individually described, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side is referred to as "left movable accessory 115A". Also, the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center is called a "middle movable accessory 115B". Also, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the right side is referred to as "right movable accessory 115C". In addition, the three movable accessories 115 are simply referred to as the movable accessories 115 when they are not distinguished from each other. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110 . Moreover, the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

The game area 111 is provided with a game peg, a pinwheel and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Also, in the game area 111, various accessories related to prize winning and lottery are provided at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area 111 is provided with an out port 117 for ejecting out of the game area 111 those game balls that have hit the game area 111 but have not entered the winning opening.

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, when a game ball wins, a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) starts 121 and 2nd start port 122, and when a game ball passes through, normal The game board 110 is provided with a starting gate (hereinafter referred to simply as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery). In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, respectively, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to herein refer to a prize winning port that triggers the operation of one predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 are provided with switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of game balls at the time of winning. It is When the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display. Also, the game board 110 is provided with a light emitting unit 137 that emits light. The light emitting portion 137 is provided around the first starting port 121 . The light emitting unit 137 has an LED light source capable of lighting with a predetermined emission color, and is controlled by the effect control unit 300 .

The second starting port 122 is provided with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory, in which a pair of tulip-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and lighted. In the electric tulip 123, when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 122, but when the blades are opened, the entrance of the second start port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the normal pattern lottery, the wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 time to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

A pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a low-probability state with a low winning probability and a high-probability state with a higher winning probability than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of a jackpot lottery. Then, it is controlled to either a low-probability state or a high-probability state based on predetermined conditions such as the number of lotteries of a big win or a special symbol lottery.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as a game state, an electric sapo state in which there are few winning opportunities to the second starting port 122 and an electric sapo state in which there are more winning opportunities to the second starting port 122 than in the electric sapo no state. have. Then, for example, under a predetermined condition such as triggered by the number of lotteries of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, it is controlled to be in either the state of no power supply or the power supply state. The electric sapo state is, for example, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a game state controlled by combinations.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a time-saving no state with a long special symbol variation time and a time-saving state with a shorter special symbol variation time than the no time-saving state.
In addition, in this Embodiment, an electric support state and a time saving state shall be controlled simultaneously. Further, in the following description, the electric sapo state and time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric sapo no state and no time saving state are simply referred to as no time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, there is a large winning opening 125 as a special electric accessory that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and a lottery is performed even if the game ball wins. The game board 110 is provided with a normal winning opening 126 that does not have a normal winning prize. A large winning opening door 125D for opening and closing the large winning opening 125 is provided in the large winning opening 125. - 特許庁In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening door 125D may be referred to as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 125 for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is provided at the lower left position of the game board 110 to display the determination result and the number of pending games.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, there are a game control board for determining the winning of special symbols, etc., an effect control board for comprehensively controlling effects, an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, various lamps and Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the performance by the movable accessory 115 are attached. A switching power supply (not shown) is provided on the rear surface of the game board 110 to convert the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and output the DC power to various substrates.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, the frame member 150 shoots game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle. Equipped with a launcher (not shown) that fires electrically. In addition, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the shooting device one by one at a timing interlocked with the operation of the lever 152 by the player, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the shooting device. and a plate 153 for temporarily storing. To this plate 153, balls to be paid out by a payout unit are put out, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is integrated with the upper and lower plates. A configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the shooting of the game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the shooting device, and a game ball accumulated in the tray 153. and an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for announcing the game state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various productions using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light-emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects with light depending on the pattern of lighting and blinking and the difference in emission color. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example is conceivable that enables an effect of changing the light irradiation direction.
The frame member 150 also has a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

2A and 2B are diagrams for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100. FIG.
The indicator 130 of the pachinko game machine 100, as shown in FIG. A second special symbol indicator 222 that operates correspondingly and a normal symbol indicator 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. The first special symbol display device 221 variably displays the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121, and then stops the display to display the determination result. The second special symbol display device 222, based on the winning of the second starting port 122, variably displays the special symbol and then stops displaying to display the determination result. Based on the game ball passing through the gate 124, the normal symbol display device 223 variably displays the normal symbol and then stops the display to display the determination result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the determination result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the determination result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the display device 130 is a first special symbol reservation display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the first special symbol display device 221, and a second special symbol display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the second special symbol display device 222. A 2 special design reservation display 219 and a normal design reservation display 220 which operates corresponding to the reservation by the normal design display 223 are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219 and the normal symbol reservation display device 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is determined by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

In the display device 130 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 performs variable display of special symbols, for example, by synchronizing and blinking a plurality of (seven in the present embodiment) LEDs all at once. . In the first special symbol display device 221, the blinking cycle of the plurality of LEDs is constant without changing from when the variation in the special symbol is started until the variation is stopped.

And the 1st special design indicator 221 expresses the change stop of a special design by maintaining the state which made LED of a predetermined position light up for example among a plurality of LED for a definite period of time.
When the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first special symbol indicator 221, for example, lights only one LED at the end among the plurality of LEDs. On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 221 lights the plurality of LEDs in a predetermined lighting pattern. In addition, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol display 221 displays different lighting patterns according to the kind of symbol when a big win is won.
In addition, the second special symbol display 222 performs the same operation as the first special symbol display 221 based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 122 .

Here, the hold will be explained. When the game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbols (while the variable display for one prize is being performed), the special symbols are changing. Secondly, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbols based on the subsequent prize winning. Therefore, subsequent winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbols for the winning game ball is not retained until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. Reserved.
It should be noted that the same processing as that for the special symbols is performed for the normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special design reservation display 219 and the normal design reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the indicator 130 has a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights to notify whether the state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. In addition, the other one is for notifying by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving state with a short special symbol variation time. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

The display 130 also has a round number display 225 for displaying the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is activated in the big winning game performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. Incidentally, the jackpot game will be described later. The round number indicator 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operation rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

The indicator 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226 . The status confirmation display 226 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. is turned on, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. Thus, since the state confirmation display 226 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether or not it is done. The installation position of the status confirmation display 226 may be the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be recognizably displayed. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 226 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 226 may be flashed. and vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 221, the second special symbol display device 222, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, the state display device 224 , the number of rounds indicator 225, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an input device for the player to make an input for the performance. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production button 161, a production key 162 adjacent to the production button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, are provided on the frame member 150 . In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect for accepting an operation of selecting one image from among a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates a production key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross to designate one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114 and press the production button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting the instructed image. As for the form of the input device, in addition to the production button 161 and production key 162 shown in the drawings, various input forms such as levers and handles can be adopted according to the contents of production.
Also, the production button 161 of this embodiment is provided so as to be vertically movable between a projecting state in which it projects upward and a non-projecting state in which it does not project.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control section and a lamp control section according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes, as main control means, a game control section 200 for determining whether a special symbol is won or the like. In addition, as a sub-control means, it is provided with an effect control unit 300 that controls the effect in general, and a payout control unit 330 that performs payout control of the payout balls.

[Structure and function of the game control part]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining winning of special symbols, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a working memory for the CPU 201. and a RAM 203 .

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high probability state or a low probability state, or in either a no time saving state or a time saving state. As a result, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a high probability state and time saving state high probability time saving game state, a low probability state and time saving state low probability time saving game state, a high probability state and no time saving state high It becomes one of the low probability time saving non-gaming state, the low probability state and the low probability time saving non-gaming state which is the non-working time saving state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high probability state and the low probability state based on predetermined conditions such as the number of lotteries of the jackpot and special symbol lottery as described above, and switches between the no time saving state and the time saving state. switch. In addition, the game control unit 200, in the time saving state, controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. I do.

The game control unit 200 acquires a random number value used for a special symbol lottery when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 . Then, the game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery using the obtained random number value, and performs a special game such as a big winning game according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 keeps the open state until the big winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies the closing condition (for example, 29.5 seconds has elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). It is controlled to repeat only a predetermined number of times according to the pattern (type). Then, the game control section 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 is opened.

In addition, the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124 . Then, the game control section 200 performs a normal symbol lottery using the obtained random number value, and controls the operation of the electric tulip 123 according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is controlled by the suspension caused by the game ball entering the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the special symbol variation, and the game ball passing through the gate 124 during the normal symbol variation. Set the hold that occurs due to
In addition, the game control unit 200, the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery, the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, the change information of the time saving no state and the time saving state, the setting information of the reservation, etc. accompanying the game control Information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command to be described later.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200, when the game ball wins the first start port 121, the second start port 122, the large winning prize port 125 and the normal winning prize port 126, one game ball hit according to the place where the game ball has won The payout controller 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121, three prize balls are awarded, when a game ball enters the second start port 122, four prize balls are awarded, and when a game ball enters the big prize winning port 125, thirteen prizes are awarded. When a game ball wins in a ball or a normal winning hole 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to a payout control unit 330 so as to pay out 10 prize balls respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls associated therewith.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of awarded balls is managed.

The game control unit 200 includes, as detection means, a first start opening detection unit (first start opening switch (SW)) 211 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first start opening 121, as shown in FIG. , the second start opening detection unit (second start opening switch (SW)) 212 that detects the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 122, the electric tulip opening and closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124 A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. A large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216 that is set to a closed state and a projecting inclined open state, and a normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the winning of a game ball into the normal winning opening 126. , and an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 for detecting an out ball consisting of game balls flowing into the out port 117 are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol holding display 218 that displays the unvaried holding number of prizes won in the first start port 121 during the variation of the special symbols, and a second special symbol during the variation of the special symbols. A second special symbol reservation display 219 for displaying the unvaried reserved number of winning prizes in the starting port 122, and a normal symbol reservation display for displaying the unvaried reserved number passed through the gate 124 during the fluctuation of the normal symbols. 220 and are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display device 221 that displays the fluctuation display of special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning a game ball to the first start port 121, and a second start port. A second special pattern display 222 for displaying the variable display of special patterns and the result of the special pattern lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to 122, and the normal pattern display for displaying the variable display of normal patterns and the result of the normal pattern lottery. A device 223, a state display 224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a round number display 225, and a state confirmation display 226 are connected.

In addition, a RAM clear switch for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 203 or updating the set value (probability of judging a big hit in judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, to the game control unit 200 (SW) 228, a setting key switch (SW) 229 for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode to be described later by operation using a setting key, and the actual performance of the pachinko gaming machine 100 can be grasped. An information display 230 for displaying performance information and set values is connected.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays from the right are set values and numerical values of performance information. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating (see FIG. 40).

Also, the game control unit 200 is connected to a shooting control unit 250 that drives a shooting device to control shooting of game balls.
The launch control unit 250 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown). Input/output ports of the firing control unit 250 are connected to a ball feed solenoid 251, a touch sensor 252, a firing volume 253, a firing solenoid 254, and the like. When the shooting control unit 250 detects that the player's hand is touching the handle 151 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 252, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 251 and the shooting solenoid 254, and adjusts the shooting volume. When the detection signal from 253 detects that the rotation angle of the handle 151 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 251 is driven and the firing solenoid 254 is driven so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 151. 99.9 balls/min.

Then, the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, the gate switch 214, the big winning opening switch 215, the normal winning opening switch 217, the out ball detection switch 227, the RAM clear switch 228, the setting key switch 229, and the launch A detection signal detected by the control unit 250 is sent to the game control unit 200 . In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 is the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, and the normal design reservation display device 220. , the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223, the state indicator 224, the round number indicator 225, the state confirmation indicator 226, and the information indicator 230. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of awarded balls to be paid out.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected with a board external information terminal board 350 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information about the number of paid out prize balls and information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. and have.
Then, the payout control section 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control section 200 .
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game control unit 200 according to the location (first start port 121, etc.) where the game ball has won. Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is configured by a drive motor for sending out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 for detecting the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball storage unit (not shown). A ball presence detection unit 336 for detecting whether or not the balls are stored, and a tray 153 for holding game balls used when a player plays a game and paid-out prize balls are in a full tank state. The full-tank detector 337 is connected. The payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected with a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various kinds of information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 provides, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340 . In addition, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, and a date and time and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the
The effect control unit 300 sets the content of the effect based on the result of determination as to whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not sent from the game control unit 200 and the variation pattern, for example. At that time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 may be received, and the effect contents corresponding to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the production button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the setting of production.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 sets the content of effect based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state and the change information of the no time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200 .
In addition, effect control section 300 sends a command instructing execution of the set effect content to image/sound control section 310 and lamp control section 320 .

Further, the production control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls production using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls production using various lamps and movable accessories 115. It is

[Structure and function of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the image and sound representing the content of the effect, and a program that is executed by the CPU 311, various data, and the like. A ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a work memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, an SNDROM 316, and a VRAM 317 used as a work memory for the VDP 314 are provided.

The image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300 .
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decoration patterns for informing the player of the determination result, characters and items for displaying the advance notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data is stored. The SNDROM 316 also stores various audio data such as music, voice, and effect sounds such as jingles to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
CPU311, based on the pending number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300, analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes commands related to drawing, and transmits the display list to the VDP314. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 uses the read image data to perform drawing processing for background image display, decorative pattern display, decorative pattern variation, character/item display, etc., and audio processing using the read acoustic data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the rendered image data. Also, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound-processed sound data.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not a limitation, and a processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided separately.

The functions of the CPU 311 and VDP 314 and the control of each device will be described more specifically.
In image/sound control unit 310, CPU 311 generates a display list that defines the content of the image to be displayed on image display unit 114, based on the command received from effect control unit 300 to instruct the execution of the content of the effect. , a drawing command including the generated display list is sent to the VDP 314 . The RAM 313 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the CPU 311 and temporarily stores data read from the ROM 312 .

The VDP 314 is a video processing circuit capable of displaying images (also referred to as effect images) forming various effects using a plurality of frames (also referred to as frame images). The VDP 314 generates each frame image using the material image data stored in the CGROM 315 based on the drawing command received from the CPU 311, and causes the image display unit 114 to continuously display the generated frame images. Image data (video signal) is transmitted to the image display unit 114 . As a result, the image display unit 114 displays a moving image composed of a plurality of frame images arranged in time series generated by the VDP 314 as an effect image. However, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 also includes a still image.

The CGROM 315 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data, etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32 pixels×32 pixels). The VRAM 317 is used by the VDP 314 as a work area for generating frame images. The VDP 314 generates clocks, synchronization signals, etc. for proper image display every approximately 16.6 milliseconds.

A VRAM 317 connected to the VDP 314 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the image display unit 114 . The VRAM 317 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 317 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used. The VRAM 317 is also provided with a frame buffer in which drawing data is created by the VDP 314 . Note that the VRAM 317 may be incorporated in the VDP 314 .

The VDP 314 uses the image data read from the CGROM 315 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer. Drawing data for one frame means data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the image display unit 114 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer is provided with a plurality of frame areas a and b. Specifically, a first frame region a and a second frame region b are provided. Each of these frame areas a and b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas a and b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) on the display surface of the image display section 114 at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

When the frame buffer is provided with the first frame area a and the second frame area b, and the drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform display on the image display unit 114, Creation (drawing) of drawing data scheduled to be displayed in the future (usually the next frame) is executed for another frame area. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer.

The VDP 314 outputs to the CPU 311 a V blank signal for permitting switching between the first frame region a and the second frame region b every approximately 16.6 milliseconds. Therefore, except for the occurrence of an irregular event such as a processing failure, the frame region in which the switching between the first frame region a and the second frame region b, i.e., the drawing is performed, is normally performed with one reception of the V blank signal. , and the frame area to be displayed is switched, thereby drawing an image for one frame and updating the display. That is, in one second, the drawing of the image and the update of the display are performed for 1000 milliseconds/16.6 milliseconds=approximately 60 frames.

In addition to the V blank signal, the VDP 314 also transmits a drawing completion signal to the CPU 311 upon completion of drawing data creation (drawing) according to the drawing command received from the CPU 311 .

Upon receiving the V blank signal, the CPU 311 executes V interrupt processing for switching between the first frame area a and the second frame area b. Note that switching between the first frame region a and the second frame region b is performed when reception of not only the V blank signal but also two signals, the V blank signal and the drawing completion signal, can be confirmed. Also good.

[Structure and function of lamp controller]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and the programs and various data that are executed by the CPU 321. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a work memory for the CPU 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, etc., based on the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Also, it controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 .

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 corresponding to the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 300 . The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the production control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 each serve as a main board provided on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board, the effect control board as a sub-board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.
In addition, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320 .

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , and a normal symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that perform operation control of various accessories and data processing related to prize balls. , an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball has won the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, for each type of random number, a numerical value within a predetermined range One numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234 . Although the details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include jackpot random numbers indicating whether or not the game is a jackpot, pattern random numbers indicating the type of pattern, variation pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and the like.
In addition, in the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ) is done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232 . In addition, as the random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random number indicating whether or not winning, the symbol random number indicating the type of winning, the variation pattern random number, etc. may be set.
The special symbol variation control section 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 according to the determination result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. type”, and “whether it is a small win or not when the big win is not won”. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) advantageous to the player based on the obtained random number value. It should be noted that the aforementioned lottery for the special symbol (big hit lottery) refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234 .

Here, the "jackpot" is classified into a plurality of types according to the game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the type of symbol is determined by a combination of no time-saving state or time-saving state, and a combination of high-probability state and low-probability state. That is, as the type of pattern based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game, a jackpot that becomes a high probability time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability time-saving game state jackpot), a low probability time-saving game state A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot), a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot), a low probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, low There can be a jackpot in a probability time-saving non-playing state). Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol.

Also, the "jackpot" may be divided into a big win in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot game in which the jackpot game time is short and almost no game balls can be expected to be paid out. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in the "long win", a round is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) until the open state of the big prize opening 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have won a prize). be In addition, in the "short hit", a round in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, the "small win" when the big win is not won is a small win game in which the big winning port 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). done. When the small prize is won, the game state before winning the small prize is continued even after the small prize is finished. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state is continued even after the small win game ends, and the game state does not shift. Similarly, when the game state at the time of winning the small win is the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the low-probability time-saving no-game state is continued even after the small-win game ends, and the game state does not shift.
Also, a "minor win" is a kind of "lose", and none of the above game states that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection section 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 . Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 is a variation pattern (for example, 13.5 seconds or more ), the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbols. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "ready-to-win" is an effect for making the player expect a big win in decorative symbols, which will be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the normal symbol determination result is “whether or not” using a random number table as shown in FIG. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines, based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231, whether or not the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 is to be performed. Also, when a plurality of types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232 .
The normal symbol variation control section 236 controls the normal symbol variation by the normal symbol display device 223 according to the determination result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 only for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines “hit” in the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. A state in which it is easy to win a prize is generated. Further, when it is determined that the tulip is "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, an operation pattern that opens twice with an opening time of 0.90 seconds, and the like.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the winning symbol as a big winning game. 125 to control the opening operation. In addition, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "small hit" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the big winning opening 125 for a specified time and specified number of times as a small winning game. . For example, there is an operation pattern in which the big winning opening 125 is opened twice with an opening time of 0.90 seconds.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes won to various accessories related to prizes and lotteries, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 and the payout control section 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random values acquired by the random number acquiring unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
The game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 executes basic processing (recovery processing) at startup when the power is turned on. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing relating to the progress of the game. Moreover, when shutting off the power, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power shut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is described as "S") 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 228 for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF (No in S602), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power shutdown is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether the checksum created at the time of power shutdown is normal (S604).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), then the game control unit 200 executes return processing (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether the jackpot game is in progress, either the high probability state or the low probability state, the time saving state and the time saving non-state). (either) is output to the effect control unit 300 to set the sub-control means. Also, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, the RAM clear switch 228 is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), and the checksum is abnormal (No in S604). As a process for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203 (S606), the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S608). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) ends, or after the setting of the sub board (see S608) ends, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 allows interrupts (S610), disables interrupts (S611), designs random number control processing (S612), initial value random number update processing (S613), and determines whether or not the power shutdown flag is ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S610) and interrupt prohibition (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variation pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is not cut off, the game control unit 200, loop processing (S610 ~ S614) and main control by interrupt Execute the process repeatedly. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff processing).

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

The power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off by performing the power cut-off processing shown in FIG. A state in which the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off is hereinafter referred to as a power-off state. For example, when an operation for shutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. Also, for example, when a power failure occurs in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state due to a connection failure of the connector that connects the power supply source to the pachinko machine 100 and the pachinko machine 100, or an instantaneous interruption based on the occurrence of chattering in the switching power supply. become.

Further, in the present embodiment, when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the power-off state, the basic processing shown in FIG. control state. Entering the game control state before the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters the power-off state is regarded as returning from the power-off state. Further, in a broad sense, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 receiving power supply in the power-off state is also included in recovery from the power-off state. This operation includes, for example, lighting various lamps, moving the movable accessory 115 and the production button 161, outputting sound from the speaker 156, displaying an image on the image display unit 114, and the like.

Here, the recovery from the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes recovery with RAM clearing and recovery without RAM clearing. RAM clearing is to initialize the contents stored in the RAM 203 (to erase the information stored in the RAM 203). Initializing the storage contents of the RAM 203 means setting the storage contents of the RAM 203 to the storage contents of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of shipment. Hereinafter, a return accompanied by RAM clearing will be referred to as an initialization return. A return without RAM clearing is referred to as non-initialization return.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state, processing using various lamps and the like is performed. This processing includes processing when initialization return is performed and processing when non-initialization return is performed. The processing in the case where initialization restoration is performed is hereinafter referred to as initialization restoration processing. Further, the processing in the case where non-initialization return is performed is hereinafter referred to as non-initialization return processing.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state, a process of causing the movable accessory 115 and the like to perform a test operation is performed. This processing includes processing when initialization return is performed and processing when non-initialization return is performed. Hereinafter, the processing when initialization return is performed is referred to as initialization test operation processing. Further, the processing in the case where non-initialization return is performed is hereinafter referred to as non-initialization test operation processing.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, processing is performed to notify that the contents stored in the RAM 203 will be initialized (RAM cleared) when the initialization return is performed. The process of notifying that the contents stored in the RAM 203 are initialized is hereinafter referred to as initialization notification process.
Details of the initialization return processing, non-initialization return processing, initialization test operation processing, non-initialization test operation processing, and initialization notification processing will be described later.

[Main control processing of game machine]
Next, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the production control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the production, and issues a prize ball to the payout control unit 330. to control the payout of

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the main control process of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in the game control, and is repeatedly executed every preset constant time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S610) in the loop processing shown in FIG. 6, the main control as the interrupt processing Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, random number update process, switch process, pattern process, electric accessory process, award ball process, output process, information program call process, game ball count process, normal base value calculation. processing, performance display data setting processing, test data creation processing, and output control processing are sequentially executed (S801 to S880).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. The details of setting the random number and updating the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a starting port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the starter switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the states of the first starter switch 211 and the second starter switch 212 in FIG. When it becomes, the processing for the special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the preliminary determination processing is performed in the first start opening switch 211 and the second start opening switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute processing for prior determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute the process.
Details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing accompanying this symbol variation. do.
In the normal design process, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal design determination section 232 and the normal design variation control section 236, and executes the normal design variation and the process associated with this design variation.
Detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), the big winning opening processing and the electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237, and controls the opening operation of the big winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123 which is a normal electric accessory based on predetermined conditions.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for controlling the number of prizes won and the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . The payout control command is generated in the process of S<b>805 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the control command storage areas of the RAM 203, and if control commands are stored in the individual storage areas (that is, control commands are generated in the processing of S802 to S805). ), the control command is read out and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each function as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203 . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the commands generated during the execution of the one cycle are output after the final command generation during the execution of the one cycle.

In the information program calling process (S810), the game control section 200 performs a process for calling the target information program.

In the game ball counting process (information program (S820)), the game control unit 200 calculates the payout number of prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes during the normal game state (low probability time saving non-playing state). A certain number of normal payouts, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 during the normal game state, and the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 regardless of the game state. Processing for counting game performance information such as the total number of outs is performed.
Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to use it for grasping the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 100 .

In the normal base value calculation process (information program (S830)), the game control unit 200 calculates the normal base value ((normal medium payout number / normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs. is calculated and rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of the base storage area set in the information RAM area which is a storage area of the RAM 203 and used as a work (work area) when executing the information program. Perform processing to save the base value.
The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for doing so, and the normal base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

In the performance display data setting process (information program (S850)), the game control unit 200 calculates the normal base values (performance information ) are switched every 5 seconds to set the performance display data to be displayed on the information display 230 . Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In the test data creation process (information program (S870)), the game control unit 200 performs a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In the output control process (program for information (S880)), the game control unit 200 outputs signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in the performance display data setting process to various display devices, and a test Performs processing for outputting signals such as test data created in data creation processing.

[Modification of Basic Operation of Game Machine]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as interrupt processing. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control process may be returned to at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In addition, while incorporating the main control process into the series of operations of the basic process, an interrupt is generated at regular time intervals in the same manner as the operations described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

When outputting a command generated by the basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands are output promptly so that there is no omission in the output processing. processing. In the case where commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and collectively output according to a request for specific processing. can be

[Random Number Update Processing by Game Control Unit]
A random number as determination information used for various lotteries in game control such as a special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. It is incremented by 1 each time. Then, the value at the time each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting port switch process (Fig. 9) and the gate switch process (Fig. 10), and is used in the special design process (Fig. 11) and the normal design process (Fig. 16). be. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the set maximum random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20(a), which will be described later), , returns to the initial value again. Also, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the information on the update interval and the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting port switch process in the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start opening switch process, a process for winning at the first start opening 121 and a process for winning at the second start opening 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned ON (S901). When the first starting port switch 211 is turned ON, next the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U1 in the winning of the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S902). . In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the pending number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on the winning of this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). . Here, since the first starting port 121 wins a prize, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is obtained. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing. The random number here refers to the jackpot random number that determines the jackpot, small hit or loss, the type of pattern (time saving state or no time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short Pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the hit), variation pattern random number value for specifying the variation pattern in the pattern variation, change pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach production described later when losing Reach random values that determine whether or not, etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S904). The preliminary determination process is a process (preliminary determination) of determining a random number acquired along with winning a prize to the starting port before the special symbol process in the symbol process (S803).

Then, the effect control unit 300, based on the determination result (preliminary determination result) of the random number determined by the prior determination processing, before the determination result by the special symbol processing in the symbol processing (S803) is notified, It is possible to perform a notice effect suggesting the determination result. This advance notice effect is performed using, for example, a pending display effect (described later) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the generation of a random number acquired upon winning a prize in the starting hole.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number U1 of reservations (S905).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the processing for winning in the first start port 121. .

Next, a process for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned ON (S908). When the second starting port switch 212 is turned ON, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number U2 in the winning prize of the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909 ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number for the lottery based on the winning prize this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). . Here, since the winning of the second start port 122, as in the above S903, the random number for the special symbol lottery (big hit random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number, etc.) is acquired. be. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S911). The content of this preliminary determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets the pending number increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the processing for winning in the second start port 122. .

Although not shown, in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, control is performed to make the pre-determination process (S911) associated with the winning of the second start port 122 non-execution (prohibited), and in the high-probability time-saving game state may perform control not to execute the preliminary determination process (S904) associated with the winning of the first start port 121.

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of gate switch processing when a game ball passes through the gate 124. As shown in FIG.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1001). If the gate switch 214 is turned ON, then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is four. If the pending number G has reached the upper limit value (No in S1002), the gate switch process is terminated because the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery for this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since the gate 124 wins a prize, a random number (such as a winning random number) for the normal symbol lottery is obtained.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number G of reservations (S1004).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets a number of reservations G increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G in S1004 in the RAM 203 (S1005), The processing for the winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol processing out of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify whether or not the jackpot game performed according to the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, since the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already executing the jackpot game, the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). It should be noted that the execution of the jackpot game can be understood as the execution of the jackpot game, which is a game related to the determination and variation of the previous special symbol lottery. Now, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), then the special symbol variation control section 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1102). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1102), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unvaried special symbols (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the reservation number U1 related to the winning of the first start opening 121 and the reservation number U2 related to the winning of the second start opening 122 are distinguished, the switch provided at the start opening corresponding to this process separately.

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2=0 (No in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol variation control section 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1106). On the other hand, if the pending number U1=0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol variation is not started, and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. is executed to end the process (S1116).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing relating to the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is performed preferentially. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, the process for the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when the number of reservations U2=0, the process for the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins, it is also possible to perform control such that the pending numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in order of winning.

After subtracting the number of reservations U1 or the number of reservations U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a big hit determination process and a variation pattern selection process by separate routines (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, this jackpot determination process and fluctuation pattern selection process set information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation patterns, etc.) are determined. In addition, these information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control unit 300 .

After that, the special symbol variation control section 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 shown in FIG. Start the variation of the special design to be (S1110). Then, a variation start command including setting information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The variation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating in S1102 (Yes in S1102), or after the fluctuation start command is set in S1111, the special symbol fluctuation control section 233 judges whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbols in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the variation time has not passed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has passed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the pattern decided by (S1113). A fluctuation stop command for stopping the decorative symbols, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, a process during stop of another routine is executed (S1115). The contents of the processing during suspension will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Jackpot determination processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the content of the big hit determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this big hit determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the big hit random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a big win or a small win is made is whether or not the value of the big win random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. (See FIG. 20(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of symbol (high-probability time-saving gaming state jackpot, low-probability time-saving non-gaming state jackpot, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by whether the value of the jackpot pattern random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. b) see).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the jackpot symbol determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination of S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 is a symbol representing a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S1206).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (no time saving state or time saving state, and high probability state or low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the judgment result of S1202 of the big hit judging process (FIG. 12), it is judged whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has made a big hit (S1302). If it is a big hit (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads a variation pattern table for big wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1302), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called ready-to-win effect to make the player expect a big win. (S1304). Whether or not the ready-to-reach production is to be executed as a variation pattern is determined by determining whether or not the value of the ready-to-reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (see FIG. 20(c)).
As a result of the determination using the random value, if the variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and stores it in the RAM 203 set (S1306). In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is not set as an executable variation pattern (variation time) (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values is a table that associates

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the variation pattern random value obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 to determine the variation pattern random value (S1308 ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or no time saving state, and whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it was a big hit or not , whether or not the ready-to-win effect is to be performed when the jackpot is not achieved), etc. Since the variation pattern table referred to differs depending on the difference, the determined variation pattern differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 to the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1309 is included in the variation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the variation pattern selected in the present embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Stopping process by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the contents of the in-stop process (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating a time saving state in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) is ON (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (fluctuation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. is examined (S1403). And if the lottery frequency J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1404). The operation to turn on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401) or after the time saving flag is turned OFF in S1404, or if the value of the lottery number J after subtracting in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then game control The unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high-probability state (hereinafter referred to as a high-probability flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). In addition, when both this high probability flag and the previous time saving flag are ON, it is in a high probability time saving gaming state, and when the high probability flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, it is in a high probability time saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) X in the high probability state (S1406), and whether the number of times of lottery X becomes 0 It is checked whether or not (S1407). Then, if the lottery number of times X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1408). The operation to turn on the high probability flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the high-precision flag is OFF (No in S1405) or after the high-precision flag is turned OFF in S1408, or if the value of the lottery number X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time hits a jackpot (S1409). Then, if it is a jackpot (Yes in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines the type of symbol (S1410). It should be noted that here, as an example of determining the type of symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit.

Here, the judgment as to whether or not it is a big win can be made based on the judgment result of the big win judging process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1409. If the winning design or the small winning design is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, it is No in S1409.

For example, when the type of symbol such as low probability symbol A is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a jackpot game state (long win game state) in which the type of symbol is a long win. It should be noted that here in the long hit, it does not distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. Whether the high-probability state or the low-probability state is established is specified by turning ON the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described large winning opening process (FIG. 17).

For example, when the type of symbol such as high probability symbol E is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a big winning gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the type of symbol is a short winning. As in the case of long winning, there is no distinction between high probability state and low probability state in short winning.

After turning ON the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1413). Moreover, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high probability flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation (S1417). Here, the contents of the opening operation differ depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an opening operation effect corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 to the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the stop processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small win (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stop processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts a small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the small winning game state. In addition, in the small winning game, as described above, the big winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process is terminated (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1501), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command, sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Here, as described in the customer waiting setting process (S1116) in FIG. This flag is set when there is no hold (No in S1103 and S1105).

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal design process among the design processes shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal design process, the normal design variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when winning the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 19) described later and it is easy to win the second start port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, it is already in the auxiliary game state and the normal design is stopped, so the normal design process is terminated without starting the normal design fluctuation (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), then the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol variation (S1602). If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1602), then the normal symbol fluctuation control section 236 determines whether or not the number G of reserved normal symbols (see FIG. 10) for the unvaried part is 1 or more (S1603). If the number of reservations G=0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no winning for starting the lottery of the normal symbols, so the process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current normal symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (S1605). Whether or not the player has won the lottery is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in a table or the like shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal design variation control unit 236 normally sets the design according to the result of the normal design lottery (S1606). That is, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal design variation control section 236 sets the normal design variation time (S1607). This variable time is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and if the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control section 236 starts the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol display device 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). In addition, it is also possible to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 normally acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 normally obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol. The variable time is set by the determination.

After starting the variation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined that the symbol is normally varying in S1602 (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1609 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation in S1608 has reached the variation time set in S1607. If the variation time has not passed (No in S1609), the normal symbol variation is continued, so the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol variation control section 236 stops the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is winning (S1611). If it is elected (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is lost (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big winning opening process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big winning opening process, the big winning opening operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the big winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning to the big winning opening 125, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is stopped during the processing (FIG. 14) and the opening operation control during the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle of an operation (S1702).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset opening operation time (opening time) has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the big winning opening 125 is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704), and initializes the number of winning prizes C (C=0). Then (S1705), 1 is added to the value of the number R of rounds for operation of the large winning opening 125 from the current value (S1706), and the operation of the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 125 and the number of rounds to be operated in the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. Examples of the case where the big winning opening 125 is activated include a case of a big win or a short win in a special symbol lottery, and a case of a small win. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the types of these wins. In addition, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the operation of the jackpot 125 is continuously performed a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and one opening of 29.5 seconds is performed in one round. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and one opening of 0.9 seconds is performed in one round. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, the door is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 seconds, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit are compared in the above example, both are opened twice for 0.9 seconds. In other words, the action of the big winning hole 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of a short win and the case of a small win. you can't.

It is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the big winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds in the case of a small winning. On the other hand, in the case of a big win (long win or short win), the big winning opening 125 must be continuously opened a plurality of times by the number of rounds R of the big win game. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish between the operation of the small hit and the operation of the short hit as described above, in the small hit, within the range where the open cumulative time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds, An operation mode is set in which the big winning opening 125 is opened two or more times, and in the short winning, the same number of rounds as the number of openings of the small winning is set.

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines that the winning number C of the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). pieces) or more (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the large winning prize port 125 is continued, so the large winning prize port processing is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or if the number of winning prizes C has reached the prescribed number (Yes in S1709), the large winning prize gate operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the big prize winning gate 125 (closes). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R for operating the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

If the number of rounds R for the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending action corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending actions set in each game of the long hitting game and the short hitting game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control section 237 sets an ending command to the RAM 203 for performing an effect in the ending operation corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control section 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, after resetting the number of rounds R for the operation of the big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the required time (ending time) has elapsed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 turns OFF the jackpot game flag after the game state setting process by the game control section 200 (S1718). The big winning opening process is terminated (S1719). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

In S1702, when it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes at S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending state (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). If not in operation (No in S1716), the operations from S1705 onward are executed, and if in operation (Yes in S1716), the operations from S1708 onward are executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, as a premise, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the symbol (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the big hit judging process (FIG. 12). In addition, since these determinations are substantially the same as S1202, S1203, and S1205 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state setting process is terminated because the game state is not changed.
When the type of symbol is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving gaming state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a low probability time-saving game state. Also, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in which the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the low-probability time-saving game state is continuously performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of symbol is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after this big hit is a low probability time saving non-game state.

When the type of symbol is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801 and S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807), and sets the initial value of the lottery number J. (S1808). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10000 in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag (S1809), and sets the initial value of the lottery times X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10000 in the illustrated example. Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a high probability time-saving game state. In this high-probability time-saving game state, if the lottery in which the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost is continuously performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of symbol is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns ON only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the lottery number X (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the high probability time saving non-gaming state. And, in this high probability time saving non-playing state, if the lottery in which the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is out is continuously performed 10000 times, the high probability time saving non-playing state ends, and the low probability time saving non-playing state is established. Become.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control section 238 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, since the electric tulip 123 is not opened, the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S1904). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds open An operating pattern is set to open three times in time. Thus, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electric chew support) that makes it easier to win the second start port 122 is done. In addition, when the time saving flag is ON or OFF, a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of winning determined in the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines that the opening time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the open time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 continues to operate (open state), so the electric tulip process is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Method of judging by random numbers]
Here, the method of determination based on random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), normal symbol process (FIG. 16), etc. will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (decision table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
Fig. 20(a) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, Fig. 20(b) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, and Fig. 20(c) shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of reach random numbers used and a configuration example of hit random numbers used in normal symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20(d), respectively.

Referring to FIG. 20(a), as a determination value of the jackpot random number, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is a jackpot when the game state is a low probability state and the game state at the time of jackpot determination is a jackpot when the game state is a high probability state. Two types and a small hit are set. The range of values of random numbers (random numbers for big hits) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In addition, in the case of the special symbol lottery in the high probability state, the winning value is set to 10, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery is performed by winning the start ports 121 and 122 in a high probability state, the probability of winning becomes ten times as compared with the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in a low probability state. In addition, the winning value of the small win is set to three regardless of whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, a special symbol lottery in a low-probability state will be described as an example. It is determined whether or not the winning value of the jackpot lottery in the low-probability state in (a) matches "5". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small hit.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), the jackpot symbols include low-probability pattern A, low-probability pattern B, high-probability pattern A, high-probability pattern B, high-probability pattern C, high-probability pattern D, high-probability pattern E, hidden pattern. Eight types of definite patterns are available. Here, the low-probability pattern A and the low-probability pattern B are patterns representing a low-probability state jackpot, among which the low-probability pattern A is a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot. indicates that there is The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability pattern A and the high-probability pattern B indicate a long hit (15 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate a long hit (8 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol E indicates that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot. The latent certainty pattern is a pattern representing a short hit (two rounds) and a high probability short time non-playing state jackpot. Therefore, the high-probability pattern E and the latent-probability pattern have the same game state after the jackpot game, but the latent-probability pattern is a condition for carrying out a latent performance that does not clearly notify the player of the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability pattern E. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 that trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol A when winning the jackpot is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot is 15/250 (=3/50).

In the high-probability pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A is 20/250 (=2/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 150/250 (=15/25).

In the high-probability pattern B, five values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 25/250 (=1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability pattern D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability pattern E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E is 25/250 (=1/10) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 5/250 (=1/50).

In the latent probability pattern, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning a latent symbol in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 100/250 (=2/5).
On the other hand, the second starting port 122 is not assigned a winning value in the latent certainty pattern, and when the second starting port 122 wins, the winning in the latent certainty pattern does not occur.

Here, taking the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random number (see S903, S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. ), it is determined whether the winning value of the low-probability symbol A matches “0 to 34”. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery such as the low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by differentiating the winning probability of the type of symbol in the case of winning the first starting hole 121 and the winning probability of the second starting hole 122, various game characteristics can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that either one of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 can be aimed easily in a specific state (mode). , it is possible to encourage players to actively participate in games.

Next, determination of reach random numbers will be described. In addition, the distribution of the reach random numbers is set according to the number of reservations as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the pending number is 0 will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect (for example, 13.5 seconds or more) determination result ( 22 random numbers are assigned to "with reach", and 228 random numbers are assigned to the determination result (without reach) that the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery does not win big, the ready-to-win effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-win effect is a effect performed in the image display section 114 when special symbols are changed. Hereinafter, the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that does not make the reach production a variable pattern that can be executed is called a production without reach, and the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that makes the reach production a variation pattern that can be executed in response to this is a production with reach. call.

Here, if the reach is explained as an example, the reach random number (see S903, S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is the reach in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "0 to 21". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, at the time of special symbol fluctuation, the display control of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222 when not distinguished) is interlocked. , the image display unit 114 performs an effect using decorative patterns. The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, 3 rows of patterns consisting of numerical sequences in which numbers from "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction. Also, the decorative pattern is displayed in one of a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red, for example. Although the details will be described later, for example, the number element 411 (FIG. 35 described later) in each decorative pattern is displayed in either blue, green, or red. Then, at the same time when the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbols (start of scrolling of the decorative symbols), the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. In general, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the same three numbers are arranged in a horizontal or oblique straight line in the stationary display of the decorative symbols. The effect using the decorative design that is performed along with the variable display of this special design is called a variable effect.

In the ready-to-win production, for example, the following operations are performed with respect to decorative symbols as a variable production. First, any two patterns (sequences) are temporarily stopped before the decorative patterns scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are fixed and stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the scroll speed for the last line is gradually slowed down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up on a straight line. After the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the SP reach effect is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a effect that makes you expect a bigger hit than reach, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and stories develop. . In addition, SPSP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than SP reach, and it is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and stories develop. is.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-win effects are set to be executed. It should be noted that the above-mentioned variable production that is performed together with the ready-to-win production is also referred to as a ready-to-reach variable production.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, before the decorative pattern scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixed and stopped, the production that gives the player a sense of expectation, such as the production with reach, is suppressed, and the horizontal (vertical) or diagonal The pattern is fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line spanning.

In this way, when the result of the determination of the big hit random number is a loss, the ready-to-win random number performs a ready-to-win effect as a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect can be executed in the image display unit 114, or the ready-to-win effect can be executed. It is a random number for determining whether to perform a reach-less production that is not a variation pattern. In addition, by changing the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect according to the number of reservations, the player can be appropriately given a sense of expectation while allowing efficient game progress.
In addition, when a jackpot is won, a reach effect is performed, and finally, the decorative patterns are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. can be done. On the other hand, in the ready-to-win effect when winning a small win or losing, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and the winning value when the time saving flag is ON Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed when there is no time-saving state, the game is won with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 in the time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the hit random value (see S1003) acquired with the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

In addition, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of wins with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, like the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 20(b)) specifying the type of symbol in the special symbol lottery, the winning symbol random number for specifying the kind of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number of the winning random number and the random number of the winning symbol random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and the normal symbol determination unit 232 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number. Determine the type of win based on random numbers.
It should be noted that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration examples of random numbers in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a setting example of variation patterns and tables used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Although illustration is omitted, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is separately provided for other game states such as the high probability time saving gaming state.
In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 . Regarding the case where the game ball wins in the second start port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be provided separately, or the game ball wins in the first start port 121. A table to be referred to in each case may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the big winning symbol and the variation pattern random number when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13). . Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. determine the variation pattern based on whether For example, when the jackpot design is "high probability design A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" allocated to "high probability design A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, the special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the reach random number (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition unit 231 , determines whether it is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the pending number "0" of "missing" in FIG. 21 or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, when the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern random number (see S903) obtained together with the jackpot random number by the random number obtaining unit 231 is the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern random values assigned to “21” matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the variation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 controls the variation pattern random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball enters the starting ports 121 and 122, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the reach A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on conditions such as the presence or absence of performance and the number of reservations. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 . In the effect control unit 300, as will be described later, as the effect at the time of the special symbol variation, the effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) is produced. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control section 200 according to this embodiment. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22(a).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the RAM 203 has a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum value of the number of reservations of the first start port 121 and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4) . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage. It has a section 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area for storing information indicating whether the starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) has won a prize. , an area for storing the acquired jackpot random numbers, an area for storing the pattern random numbers, an area for storing the reach random numbers, and an area for storing the variation pattern random numbers. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random numbers are stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control section 300 according to this embodiment. FIG. 23(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 23(a).
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the RAM 303 has a first reservation storage area 305 and a second reservation storage area 306 as reservation status storage areas for storing the status of the reservation ball. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 correspond to the reservation of the winning to the first start gate 121 and the reservation of the winning to the second start gate 122, respectively. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d includes a hold flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the hold flag and a notification flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the notification flag. and a region. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a reserve ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is 3, the pending flags are turned ON in the three pending flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the result of prior determination according to the game state and effect situation. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the announcement effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the announcement effect is not performed. Although details will be described later, as a result of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S2703), for example, when performing the notice effect for the third reserved ball out of the three reserved balls, the third memory that is the target of the preliminary determination The notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the unit 305c.

Although not shown in particular, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter referred to as a prior determination information storage area) in which prior determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination processing (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on the above random numbers. The content of the pre-determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). If it is, it is information for indicating the type of the pattern, the length of the variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the ready-to-win effect, and the contents of the variation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is stored together with information (hereinafter referred to as retention information) related to the hold corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process has been performed, or independently of this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. - 特許庁

[Pre-judgment processing]
Next, the advance determination processing (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the prior determination processing in the present embodiment, by performing the same determination as the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11), whether or not the special symbol processing is determined to be a big hit, in other words, it is determined to be a big hit by the variation. determine whether or not Specifically, in the game control unit 200, a preliminary determination is performed as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 .

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the details of the preliminary determination processing (S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (S2401), and when it determines that it is a high probability state (Yes in S2401), A table is selected to determine the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number in advance (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, a table for low probability state is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the prior determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that it is the time saving state (Yes in S2404), The table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Furthermore, the table for time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for time saving non-state is selected, and the reach random number is determined in advance (S2407). Furthermore, the table for time saving no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is determined in advance (S2408).

Thereafter, the game control unit 200, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the prior determination of the reach random number, and the result of the prior determination of the variation pattern, It is stored in the advance judgment information storage area as advance judgment information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the effect control section 300, the preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is based on the random number value acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122 (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the determination table used in the big hit determination process (FIG. 20 ) and a decision table having the same structure as the one shown in FIG. That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the big win determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine (see S1108 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the prior determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers in addition to the jackpot determination process in order to determine random numbers in the preliminary determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program relating to the jackpot determination process and the advance determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the big win determination, the determination table used for the big win determination may also be used for the preliminary determination.

In addition, only the prior determination (whether it is a big hit or not) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, but in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol lottery is also pre-read (preliminary determination). The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is a random number for variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122 and the variation pattern table (FIG. 21 (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the variation pattern, using the random number value for selecting the variation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table of the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol process, it is selected. Fluctuation patterns can be read ahead.

In this case, in order to foresee the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Moreover, regarding the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to prefetching of variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in program size.

It should be noted that, if the pre-determination process and the jackpot determination process at the time of special symbol variation are performed in the same subroutine using the same determination table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-determination result and the special symbol variation There may be a case where the judgment result by the big hit judging process of (1) is different. That is, it is a case where the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, or whether it is a time saving state or a time saving no state) changes before the start of the special symbol variation after the execution of the preliminary determination process. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used according to the gaming state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between when the preliminary determination process is executed and when the big win determination process is executed. . Therefore, even if the same random number obtained at the time of winning to the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the production control unit 300, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, if the game state changes before the start of the special symbol variation, the production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. can be done.

[Command configuration and transmission method]
Here, the configuration and transmission method of commands (commands for effect control and commands for setting) output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25-1 is a diagram showing the configuration of commands. FIG. 25-1(a) shows the data structure of the command, and FIG. 25-1(b) shows the structure of the command as a bit string.

As shown in FIG. 25-1(a), one command of the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 consists of 2 bytes. This command consists of a 1-byte "code" as the first data section and a 1-byte "data" as the second data section. "Code" indicates the type of command, and "Data" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 using a start-stop synchronization with one serial signal. More generally, the "code", which is the first data part, has a size of a bits (a is an integer of 2 or more), and the value of the leading 1 bit is specified as either 1 or 0. , the second data part "data" has a size of n×a bits (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the leading 1-bit value is different from the leading 1-bit value of the first data part. specified in the value.

Since the start-stop synchronization is used, each of the "code" and "data" constituting the command is provided with a 1-bit start bit (a bit labeled "S" in the figure) at the beginning and a 1 at the end. A bit end bit (a bit labeled "E" in the figure) is provided. A 1-bit parity bit (indicated as "P" in the drawing) is provided for each of the "code" and "data" forming the command.

As shown in FIG. 25-1(a), the "code" and "data" forming the command both have a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). Then, when transmitted, the "code" and "data" are each provided with a start bit, an end bit and a parity bit. Therefore, in the effect control unit 300 that receives the command, it is not easy to identify whether the received data string is the "code" or "data" of the command from the outline of the data string. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a flag is set for distinguishing between "code" and "data". Specifically, the value of a specific part of the 8-bit value that makes up the "code" and the value of the part that corresponds to the specific part of the "code" among the 8-bit values that make up the "data" are made different. .

In the example shown in FIG. 25-1(b), the leading 1 bit of each of "code" and "data" is used as a flag. That is, in the 8-bit value forming the "code", the leading 1-bit value is set to "1", and in the 8-bit value forming the "data", the leading 1-bit value is set to "0". . Thereby, the effect control section 300 can identify whether the data string is "code" or "data" by checking the value of the first bit following the start bit of the received data string. Note that the specific values of the flags are merely examples, and values different from the values shown above may be used as long as "code" and "data" can be distinguished.

Here, since the leading 1-bit value of "code" is specified as "1", the range of possible values for "code" is 128 from 10000000B (=80H) to 11111111B (=FFH). is. The letter "B" attached to each value indicates binary notation, and the letter "H" indicates hexadecimal notation. In addition, since the leading 1-bit value of "data" is specified as "0", the range of possible values for "data" is 128 values from 00000000B (=00H) to 01111111B (=7FH). be. That is, according to the configurations shown in FIGS. 25-1(a) and 25-1(b), 128 types of commands, each of which can take 128 types of values, can be set.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, many kinds of effects are executed according to the game state, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, and the like. Therefore, a large number of commands are prepared for commands for effect control. In particular, the above 128 "data", which are values indicating the specific content of the command, may be insufficient. On the other hand, a number smaller than the above 128 "codes" indicating the type of command is usually sufficient. Therefore, it is conceivable to use part of the "code" bit string to describe the value of "data".

For example, consider the case where the last 1 bit of "code" is used to describe the value of "data". Each bit in the 8-bit bit string that constitutes the "code" and "data" is hereinafter referred to as the 1st bit to the 8th bit. In addition, apart from the bit string that makes up the "code", the value of the "code" that actually indicates the type of command is called the "code value". The indicated "data" values are referred to as "data values". Then, the code value is described using the 1st to 7th bits of the "code" bit string, and the data value is described by using the entire "data" bit string (from the 1st bit to the 8th bit). , and the 8th bit of the "code".

With this configuration, the possible range of code values is 1000000B (=40H) to 1111111B (=7FH) because the value of the first bit is specified as "1" and the total size is 7 bits. ) are 64. In addition, the possible range of data values is 128 represented by 8 bits of "data" in which the value of the first bit is specified as "0" and the values of the 8th bit of "code" are "0", " 1”, the number is 256. Therefore, it is possible to set a command having 256 kinds of values as data values.

Note that the above configuration when describing a data value using part of the "code" is merely an example, and the specific number of bits and values are not limited to the above configuration example. For example, the 7th and 8th bits of the "code" may be used to describe the data value. More generally, a predetermined type of data (data value) is generated by using predetermined bits forming a "code" that is a first data section and bits forming a "data" that is a second data section. is recorded. Then, other types of data (code values) different from the predetermined types of data (data values) are recorded using the remaining bits in the "code", which is the first data portion, excluding the predetermined bits. be. In other words, the a-bits constituting the second data portion “data” and the b-bits constituting the first data portion “code” (b is an integer smaller than a−1 and equal to or greater than 1) are are used to record data values of size (a+b) bits.

Also, as a means of increasing the number of data values that can be handled, it is conceivable to increase the bit string of "data" that describes data values. For example, it is conceivable to prepare "first data" and "second data" as bit strings describing data values. In this case, if each bit string is 8 bits, a data value can be described by a bit string of 16 bits in total. If the second bit of the 8-bit bit string is used as a flag to distinguish between the "first data" and the "second data", for example, the first bit and the second bit of the "first data" can be '00B' and the first and second bits of the 'second data' can be '01B'. The first bit has a value of "0" as a flag for identifying "code". In other words, the second data part "data" has a size of bit strings ("first data", "second data", . , for each a bit), the same value as the value of the leading 1 bit is set.

With this configuration, the range of values that the "first data" can take is 64 from 00000000B (=00H) to 00111111B (=3FH), and the range of values that the "second data" can take is: Since there are 64 from 01000000B (=40H) to 01111111B (=7FH), the total is 4096 (=64×64). Here, the first bit is used as a flag for distinguishing between "code" and "data" ("first data" and "second data"), and "first data" and "second data" are Although the second bit is used as a flag for identifying , the first and second bits may be used to set flags for identifying four types of bit strings. For example, "code" can have the first and second bit values as "11B", and "data" can have the first and second bit values as "00B", "01B", or "10B". Conceivable.

[Configuration example for command output in RAM of game control unit]
FIG. 25-2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in the RAM 203. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 25-2, the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 has a command storage area (storage area) to which individual commands generated by various processes such as the main control process shown in FIG. 8 are allocated. . In the example shown in FIG. 25B, 31 command storage areas from area 01 to area 031 are set in the RAM 203 . Here, assignment of commands to each command storage area does not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, it is possible to allocate multiple commands that are not generated at the same time to the same command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, a plurality of commands are assigned to area 01, area 09, area 012, area 019, area 020, area 021, area 022, area 023, and area 030, and other commands One command is assigned to each storage area.

In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, area 01 is assigned commands relating to power-on. Commands related to power-on include a command for controlling power-on during RAM clearing and a command for controlling power-on during recovery. Since these commands are generated in different scenes, they are not generated at the same time, and are all assigned to area 01 .

Areas 02 to 04 are assigned three commands related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 (denoted as "starting gate 1 winning" in the figure). One of the commands related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is a command indicating the determination (prefetching) result in the preliminary determination based on the winning of the first starting port 121 (see S904 in FIG. 9) ("Special Figure 1 "Pattern look-ahead") and is assigned to area 02. The other one is a command (described as "special figure 1 fluctuation pattern prefetching" in the figure) indicating the prefetching (preliminary judgment) result of the fluctuation pattern specified along with the judgment result, and is assigned to the area 03. Furthermore, the other one is a command ("special figure 1 reservation (+1)" in the figure) indicating that the number of reservations for the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the winning to the first start port 121 ) and is allocated to area 04 .

Areas 05 to 07 are assigned three commands related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 (denoted as "starting gate 2 winning" in the figure). One of the commands related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is a command indicating the determination result in the preliminary determination based on the winning of the second starting port 122 (see S911 in FIG. 9) ) and is assigned to the area 05 . The other one is a command indicating the result of prefetching of the variation pattern specified together with the determination result (in the figure, it is described as "special figure 2 variation pattern prefetching") and is assigned to the area 06. Furthermore, the other one is a command ("special figure 2 reservation (+1)" in the figure) indicating that the number of reservations for the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the winning to the second start port 122 ) and is assigned to the area 07 .

In the area 08 to area 010, five commands related to normal pattern lottery described) are assigned. Among the commands relating to the normal design lottery, one of the "normal pattern reservation" commands indicates that the number of reservations of the normal design lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the game ball passing through the gate 124. It is a command (shown as "normal map hold (+1)" in the figure) and is assigned to area 08. "Normal pattern type" command designates the normal pattern representing the judgment result in the normal pattern lottery, and a command indicating that the normal pattern display 223 has started the variable display (described as "normal pattern fluctuation start" in the figure) and is assigned to area 09 . The "normal pattern confirmation" command is a command indicating that the normal symbol display device 223 is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol representing the judgment result of the normal symbol lottery is confirmed ("normal symbol confirmation" in the figure). description) and is assigned to area 09 . The "normal figure open/close" command is a command (described as "normal electric open / close" in the figure) indicating that the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric accessory, is operated (auxiliary game) based on the determination result of the normal pattern lottery. Yes, and is assigned to region 09. Another one of the "normal pattern hold" command is a command indicating that the number of reservations has been updated (here, the value is decreased by 1) due to the processing of the normal pattern lottery ("normal pattern hold (- 1)”) and is allocated to area 010.

Here, in the processing of the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbols, the stop display of the normal symbols, and the operation of the electric tulip 123 by the auxiliary game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, when another game ball passes through the gate 124 while the electric tulip 123 is operating, the variable display of normal symbols is not started (see FIG. 16). Therefore, none of the above three types of commands, ie, "general map type", "general map determination", and "general power open/close" are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 25-2, these three types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 09).

Areas 011 to 014 are assigned nine commands (described as "special figure variation" and "special figure special electric" in the figure) relating to the special symbol lottery. Among the commands related to the special symbol lottery, one of the "special figure variation" commands is a command ( In the figure, it is described as "game state") and is assigned to the area 011. Another one of the "special symbol variation" commands designates a special symbol representing the determination result of the special symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222. It is a command (described as "special figure designation" in the figure) that indicates that the has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Still another one of the "special symbol variation" commands is a command (described as "variation pattern" in the figure) specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation performed in the special symbol lottery, and is assigned to the area 013. Still another one of the "special figure fluctuation" commands is a command (in the figure, "special figure reservation ( -1)”) and is allocated to area 014.

On the other hand, one of the "special special electric" commands is a command indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state (described as "customer waiting" in the drawing), and is assigned to the area 012. FIG. Another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (in the figure, "special electric “Open”) and allocated to area 012 . Still another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "jackpot OP" in the figure) indicating that the opening operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Still another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "jackpot ED" in the drawing) indicating that the ending operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. FIG. Still another one of the "special pattern special electric" commands is to stop and display the first special pattern display device 221 and the second special pattern display device 222, and confirm the special pattern representing the determination result of the special pattern lottery. It is a command shown (described as "special figure confirmation" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 012.

Here, in the processing of the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols, the stop display of the special symbols, and the operation of the special game opening 125 are sequentially executed as a series of operations. And, during execution of the special game, the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of other game balls is not started (see FIG. 11). Also, in the jackpot game, the opening operation, the operation of the big winning opening 125, and the ending operation are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Therefore, the "special figure designation" command in the above "special figure variation" command and the five types of "special figure special electric" commands are not generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 25-2, these six types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 012).

Areas 015 to 018 are assigned four commands related to switch detection (denoted as "switch pass" in the figure). One of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has passed through the gate 124L on the left side of the game area 111 (denoted as "left gate passing" in the drawing), and is assigned to the area 015. FIG. Another one of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has passed through the gate 124R on the right side of the game area 111 (described as "right gate passage" in the figure), which is assigned to the area 016. . Still another one of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122 (described as "starting port SW2 passing (electric chew)" in the figure), which is assigned to area 017. It is Still another one of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 125 (described as "big winning hole win" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 018 .

Areas 019 to 030 are assigned commands relating to errors (denoted as "error" in the figure). Errors detected by the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 include, for example, a full tank error indicating that the tray 153 (see FIGS. 1 and 2(b)) is filled with balls to be dispensed, and a front surface of the frame member 150. A door open error indicating that the frame is in an open state, a payout error indicating that game balls cannot be put out by the payout unit, and various detection switches such as the gate switch 214 and the starter switches 211 and 212 are not activated. There is a switch unconnected error, etc. that indicates that it is connected. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, these errors are assigned to areas 019 to 023, respectively. Also, for each error, there is a command that indicates the occurrence of each error (indicated as "~ error start" in the figure) and a command that indicates that each error has been resolved (indicated as "~ error end" in the figure). , are assigned to the same command storage area.

In addition, various control items and error items are set according to the specifications and functions of the pachinko game machine 100, and a command corresponding to the control item, a command indicating that an error has occurred, and an error resolution depending on the type of error. It may be configured to generate a command or the like indicating that. These commands can be appropriately assigned to the command storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, commands relating to various errors are individually assigned to areas 024 to 030. FIG. Also, a command for detecting and notifying a specific winning (denoted as "designation of winning notification" in the drawing) is assigned to the area 031. FIG.

As described above, in the command storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200, one type or a plurality of types of commands are associated with one command storage area. Then, in the main control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control unit 200 stores the generated command in the command storage area associated with the command.
Here, in the main control process, not all commands are necessarily generated each time one cycle of processing is executed. For example, when there is no winning to the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, the commands related to winning to the starting ports 121 and 122 and the "special figure variation" command are not generated. In addition, among the commands relating to the normal symbol lottery, the "normal pattern open/close" command and the "special pattern special electric" command are not generated unless it is the timing at which these electric accessories should be operated. Also, a command related to the occurrence of an error is not generated unless an error has occurred in the first place.
Therefore, when the output process of the main control process (see S806 in FIG. 8) is performed, commands are normally stored in some of the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203. No commands are stored in other command storage areas.

[Command output operation]
FIG. 25-3 is a flow chart showing the content of output processing by the output control unit 240. FIG.
In this embodiment, the output control unit 240 sequentially focuses on the command storage areas of the RAM 203 shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 25-3, the output control unit 240 of the game control unit 200 is, first, among the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203, the first command storage area (area 01 in the example shown in FIG. 25-2) (S2501) and checks whether a command is stored (S2502). And if the command is stored (it is Yes at S2502), the output control part 240 will read the command stored and will output it to the production control part 300 (S2503).

If no command is stored in the command storage area of interest (initially, area 01) (No in S2502), or after outputting the command stored in the command storage area in S2503, the output control unit 240 , whether or not there is a command storage area with the next area number (S2504). If there is a next command storage area (Yes in S2504), the output control unit 240 focuses on that command storage area (S2505), returns to S2502, checks whether there is a command (S2502), and outputs (S2503). repeat. Then, when the last command storage area (area 031 in the example shown in FIG. 25-2) is processed, there is no command storage area with the next area number (No in S2504), so the output process ends. do.

[Setting the command output order]
In the main control process, when a command is generated in each process described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, the generated command is usually stored in the corresponding command storage area of the RAM 203 immediately. That is, commands are generally stored in the command storage area in the order in which the commands were generated.
On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 25-3, in the output processing by the output control unit 240, each command storage area is focused on and stored in a certain order (in the above example, in order of area number). Output command. That is, the commands are output in a specific predetermined order regardless of the order in which the commands were generated. This is because there are cases where it is desirable to transmit specific commands to the production control unit 300 in a specific order in order to prevent confusion in the production control of the production control unit 300 based on commands. That is, since the production control unit 300 executes the production control based on the commands in the order received from the game control unit 200, the difference in the order of receiving the commands may cause confusion such as inconsistency in the production control. , it is necessary to prevent this.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of the door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message such as "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state to the image display unit. 114 to display. In addition, the effect control unit 300 causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. Moreover, the production|presentation control part 300 lights the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example as a mode which shows an abnormal state.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control section 300 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the operation of the effect control section 300. As shown in FIG.
The operation of the effect control section 300 consists of main processing shown in FIG. 26(a) and interrupt processing shown in FIG. 26(b). Referring to FIG. 26(a), the effect control unit 300 performs initial setting at the time of activation (S2601), and after performing cycle setting of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S2602), according to the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2603), interrupt processing is accepted.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S2602. Referring to FIG. 26(b), in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S2611). In this command reception process, the effect contents (effect pattern) are selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs effect button processing for accepting the player's operation of the effect button 161 or the like (S2612). Thereafter, the effect control section 300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 (S2613). As a result, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, movement of the movable accessory 115, and light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by production control unit]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the details of the command reception process (S2611 in FIG. 26(b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command have been received (S2701). It should be noted that the pre-determined result command and the pending number increase command are set in the starting opening switch process shown in FIG. ) is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
And, when the effect control unit 300 determines that it has received the pre-determination result command and the reservation number increase command (Yes in S2701), it adds 1 to the value of the reservation number held in the RAM 303 (S2702). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the number of reservations increase command (S2703). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the prior determination result command and the pending number increase command (No in S2701), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation start command (S2704). This variation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the variation start command (Yes in S2704), the effect control unit 300 executes effect selection processing (S2705). In addition, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number is a random number that is periodically updated in S2603 of the main processing shown in FIG. 26(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the pre-determination result command, the hold number increase command and the variation start command (No in S2701 and S2704), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation stop command (S2706). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the fluctuation stop command (Yes in S2706), the effect control section 300 executes the process during the end of the fluctuation effect (S2707). In addition, in the processing during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM303.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a variation start command and a variation stop command (No in S2701, S2704 and S2706), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for opening (S2708). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopped process shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2708), the effect control unit 300 executes a jackpot effect selection process (S2709). Details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command and an opening command (No in S2701, S2704, S2706 and S2708), the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game (S2710). This ending command is a command that is set in the big winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes at S2710), the effect control unit 300 executes ending effect selection processing (S2711). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command and an ending command (No in S2701, S2704, S2706, S2708 and S2710), then the effect control unit 300 , a customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2712). Specifically, when receiving a customer waiting command, the effect control unit 300 sets a customer waiting effect command for performing a customer waiting effect (demonstration effect) in the RAM 303, and ends the customer waiting command receiving process.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S2703) and the effect selection process (S2705) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the pending number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects the effect pattern (predetermined effect pattern) used in the predetermined effect based on the predetermination result command and the pending number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that give advance notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the variation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a pending display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 and the second special symbol reservation display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, the image display unit 114 performs a hold display suggesting the occurrence of a hold or the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this suspension display effect, the preliminary determination result is reflected in the display mode of the suspension display. As a result, it is possible to execute a pre-determination effect suggesting to the player the determination result when the random number determination by the special symbol processing is performed after that regarding the reserved ball.
In the following description, the reservation (right) for which the pre-determination result is to be notified by the pre-determination effect is called the notification target. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the right to be notified even after the symbol variation is started with regard to the hold, which is the subject of notification, will be referred to as the subject of notification.

In addition, although the case where the pending display effect is used as a pre-judgment effect is explained here, by reflecting it in the various effect contents performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing, a variety of notice effects It becomes possible to do For example, production using the production image displayed on the image display unit 114, production by light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, production by the movement of movable accessories, production by sound output such as music and sound effects, etc. It can be set as a judgment production pattern.

In addition, the pre-determination effect is executed along with the symbol variation for the other winning balls performed prior to the symbol variation for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination has been performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holding balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). Moreover, priority is given to digestion of the ball held in the second starting port 122 . Here, when the upper limit of the number of balls held in the second starting port 122 is set to 4, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for the ball held in the second starting port 122, the symbol variation for the ball held is performed. Before that, including the variation currently being varied (referred to as the relevant variation), symbol variation is performed for a maximum of four winning balls. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been pre-determined, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change is performed for the reserved ball, the notice effect that spans the multiple pattern changes (continuous notice effect ).

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the pending number command including the value of the added pending number and the information of the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process to the RAM 303 (S2804). In order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determined effect pattern, the number-of-holds command includes information indicating the pattern. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2811). Also, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of symbol, the game state after the jackpot game, the variation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation production pattern for symbol variation by image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets a variable production start command for instructing the execution start of the selected production in the RAM303 (S2814). The variable effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. By receiving the variable effect start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data for representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting a variation performance pattern for symbol variation in S2813, a variation performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the advance notice effect, etc. are determined. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is effect display performed by the image display unit 114 along with the variable display of the special symbols performed by the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 . In the variable display of the decorative symbols, a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation production patterns are set for the variation pattern, the production random number (one of the random numbers updated in S2603 of FIG. 26 (a) , Acquire production random value when receiving fluctuation start command) may be used to select a fluctuation production pattern by lottery.

Also, in the effect selection process, a decorative design to be displayed as a stop design is determined according to a special design designation command designating a special design representing the determination result of the special design lottery. For example, when receiving a special symbol designation command indicating that the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the effect control unit 300 uses the effect random number to display a decorative symbol (for example, "454 ”) is determined (see FIG. 34(A), which will be described later).
In addition, unlike this description, according to a special figure designation|designated command, instead of the production control part 300, the image/sound control part 310 may determine the decoration design displayed as a stop design.

The pre-determined effect selection process and the effect selection process performed by the CPU 301 of the effect control unit 300 are repeatedly executed at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). That is, the effect control unit 300, at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), by interrupt processing to obtain a pre-determined result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, or a variation stop command, to these various commands Based on this, pre-determination effect selection processing and effect selection processing are executed.
Furthermore, as described above, the drawing processing and output processing performed by the VDP 314 of the image/sound control unit 310 are repeatedly performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 16.6 milliseconds). That is, the image/sound control unit 310 recognizes that the pending number command or the variable effect start command is acquired at predetermined time intervals (for example, 16.6 milliseconds), and executes drawing processing and output processing. .

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, with respect to the timing at which the game control unit 200 creates the variation start command, the effect control unit 300 and the image/sound control unit 310 each perform processing timing. time lag may occur.

The effect control unit 300 performs processing at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) as described above. Therefore, when the effect control unit 300 acquires a variation start command from the game control unit 200 when the effect control unit 300 ends the effect selection process, for example, the effect control unit 300 performs a new effect selection process for a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds ) will be executed later.
Further, the image/sound control unit 310 performs processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, 16.6 milliseconds) as described above. Therefore, when the image/sound control unit 310 recognizes that the variable effect start command has been acquired when the image/sound control unit 310 has finished drawing processing and output processing, for example, new drawing processing and output processing are performed. It will be executed after a predetermined time (for example, 16.6 milliseconds).

From the above, it takes up to several tens of milliseconds (for example, 4 milliseconds plus, for example, 16.6 milliseconds) may occur. Therefore, at the timing when the special symbols on the display device 130 controlled by the game control unit 200 start to fluctuate, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 114 controlled by the image/sound control unit 310 (smaller symbols to be described later) are displayed. (including symbols) may be delayed.

Similarly, after the game control section 200 creates a fluctuation stop command, it takes up to several tens of milliseconds (for example, 4 milliseconds plus, for example, 16.6 milliseconds) may occur. Therefore, at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbols on the display device 130 controlled by the game control unit 200 stops, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 114 controlled by the image/sound control unit 310 (smaller symbols to be described later) (including symbols) may be delayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing of starting or stopping the variation of the special symbols may differ from the timing of starting or stopping the variation of the decorative symbols. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbols and the variation time of the decorative symbols may differ.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot effect selection process (S2709) in FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3001), and selects a pattern of effect (jackpot effect pattern) (S3002). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the big win effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, The jackpot effect selection process is terminated (S3003). As a result, the effect during the big hit is determined. It should be noted that in the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received. It should be noted that the big hit effect can be regarded as an effect performed when executing the big hit game related to the determination and variation of the previous special symbol lottery.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2711) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects a pattern of effect (ending effect pattern) (S3102). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, Ending effect selection processing is ended (S3103). It should be noted that in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

When the command reception processing is completed as described above, any one of a variation performance start command, a variation performance end command, a big winning performance start command, an ending performance start command, and a customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303. - 特許庁

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect button processing (S2612 in FIG. 26(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated by the player during a predetermined acceptance period (effective period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operation means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key or the peripheral key of the effect key 162 to turn it on. Further, when an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100, detection of the operation of the device is included. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

If the operation means such as the production button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the production control unit 300 sets the production button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303, and ends the production button processing. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2613) in FIG. Send to control unit 320 . Then, the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 perform image display by the image display unit 114, sound output by the speaker 156, operation of the movable accessory 115, operation of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, based on the received command. It controls light emission and the like to execute the set effects.

[Initial operation of various drive sources]
Next, the initial operation of various driving sources will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, various drive sources such as the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 and the big winning entrance door opening/closing unit 216 are activated before the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes ready for playing. is performed. In the following, the configuration required to perform the initial operations of various drive sources and the operation contents of the initial operations will be described.

32 to 56, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members in the above constituent members and the constituent members described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56 .

Also, the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 and the big prize opening/closing unit 216 described above correspond to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b and the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b, which will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56, respectively. do. In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko game machine 100, game board 110, rail member 112, game area 111, guide member 113, normal prize winning port 126 (normal winning port switch 217), gate 124 (gate switch 214), first start port 121 (first start opening switch 211), second start opening 122 (second start opening switch 212, electric tulip 123, electric tulip opening/closing part 213), big winning opening 123 (large winning opening switch 215, big winning opening door opening/closing part 216), display device 130, movable accessory 115, image display unit 114, frame member 150, sub board, main control board, CPU 201, RAM 203, RAM 333, payout control unit 330, setting key switch 229, RAM clear switch 228, information Display 230, board external information terminal board 350, switching power supply, frame lamp 157, board lamp 116, speaker 156, status confirmation display 226, touch sensor 233, out ball detection switch 227, first special symbol display 221, Second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, out port 117, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state The display device 224 and RAM clear are the game machine 1, the game board 5, the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, the game area 5a, the decorative frame 40, and the general winning opening 43 ( General winning opening detection switch 43a), normal gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), variable starter 46 (second start opening 47, second start opening detection switch 47a, second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second starting opening opening/closing member 48), second variable winning section 55 (second big winning opening 56, second large winning opening detection switch 56a, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57, second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b), main information display 69, first and second movable members 73a and 73b, first image display device 70, outer frame 2, game board mounting frame 3, and glass frame 4 , production control board 130 and payout control board 120, main control board 110, main CPU 110a, main RAM 110c, payout RAM 121c, payout control unit 121, setting key switch 112a, RWM clear switch 111a, information display 113, game information output terminal board 90, power supply board 160, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, audio output device 9, status confirmation display 68, touch sensor 15 a, out ball detection switch 39a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, out port 39, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol holding display 65, round number display 66, right hitting display 67, corresponds to RWM clear.

[First Embodiment]
(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 32, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window part is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), second variable winning portion 55 (second big winning port 56, second big winning port detection switch 56a, A second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 and a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and a main information display 69 is provided outside the game area 5a.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction about the left side. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a formed with a window portion for allowing the rear side to be visually recognized. , a movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. In addition, a production control device 130A having a production control board 130 is provided behind the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A having a main control board 110 is provided below the production control device 130A. ing.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on the setting confirmation operation, and initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in board unit 500 Drive source initial operation processing and the like are performed to Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the prize ball processing of the timer interrupt, and after the power is restored, the number of payouts designation command corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120. .

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the first power-on or irregular power restoration The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power interruption during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the setting value (probability of judging a big hit in judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is not within the proper range , the process proceeds to step S22.

The "set value (playing) area" is an area in which set values are saved when not in the setting change mode, and is an area in which fixed set values are saved. The set value range in the set value (in-game) area is "1 to 4", which is a value obtained by adding +1 to the set value in the set value (in-game) area.
The "set value (changed) area" is an area in which the set value being set is temporarily saved in the setting change mode. The set value range in the set value (during change) area is 0 to 3, which is a value minus 1 from the set value in the set value (during game) area.
Note that the term "set value area" simply means "set value (playing) area" and "set value (changing) area".

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Notify of unrecoverable error" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 indicates that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program). Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated. A process for performing an initial operation is performed over a predetermined period. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame Illumination device 10 for disk and illumination device 74 for disk are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it display the display which alert|reports that.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying on the information display 113 the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S29. Specifically, the above-described various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are initially operated for a predetermined period. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or The lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, white) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power failure). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which will be described later, on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value (in-game) area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the setting was being changed, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game will not progress in a state where the setting value not intended by the game parlor side is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved. becomes possible.

Further, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, and second image display are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. By checking the device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It is possible to recognize something. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

The setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include, as a condition, that the open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 is in the ON state. The open detection switch 31a is provided on the game board mounting frame 3, for example. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, unrecoverable error processing is executed. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a outputs a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S19-2, the state confirmation display 68 displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, the game clerk can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The “setting change notification” means displaying a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or The device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while the setting is being changed. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk checks the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the voice output device 9, and thereby grasps that the setting is being changed. becomes possible.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the set value in the set value (in-game) area and saves it in the set value (in-change) area. Initialize (clear to 0) the set value (in-game) area.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (under change) area is within the proper range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (under change) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-8, and it is determined that the set value in the set value (under change) area is not within the proper range. If so, the process moves to step S19-7.

If it is determined in step S19-6 that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is not within the proper range, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area to the initial value " 0”.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-8. Specifically, the set value in the set value (under change) area is referred to, and the value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-10, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-13.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value in the set value (under change) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated setting value is "4" which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), a process of correcting the setting value to "0" is performed.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, the set value in the set value (under change) area is referred to, and the value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display 113 to grasp the set value before confirmation.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a set value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no set value confirmation operation, the set value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a increments the set value in the set value (changed) area by 1 and saves it in the set value (in game) area, and in step S19-15 sets the set value (changed) area. Initialize the value (clear to 0).

At step S19-16, the main CPU 110a terminates the display of the set values on the information display 113, and at step S19-17 terminates the display of the status confirmation display 68, thereby terminating the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the setting value is out of the proper range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indeterminate value is set as the setting value and the gaming machine unexpectedly malfunctions. It is possible to prevent the game shop and the player from being troubled by the action, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), the game clerk operates the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the frame illumination on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. By checking the device 10 and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It's becoming That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Although the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation operation may be performed by turning the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, or by turning the dedicated switch OFF. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be set to ON state.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the set values) in the RWM area for the game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

Although the RWM clear designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed, the RWM clear start designation command is transmitted instead of the RWM clear designation command. Alternatively, instead of the power-on designation command, an RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clearing end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clearing process, or may be transmitted after the RWM clearing process is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S28-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting confirmation is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S28-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. FIG. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S28-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming the setting value") indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk checks the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the voice output device 9, thereby grasping that the settings are being checked. becomes possible.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S28-4. Specifically, the set value in the set value (in-game) area is referenced, and a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S28-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S28-6, ends the display on the status confirmation display 68 in step S28-7, and ends the current setting change process.

It should be noted that the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and the power recovery designation command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is completed, but instead of the setting confirmation designation command, the setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting checking signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the game ready state where the game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a Signal input from devices (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second big winning opening detection switch 56a) Presence or absence is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if game balls enter various prize winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out. It's like Also, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. The display is not performed, and the big winning game and the small winning game are not executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated and the normal pattern display device 62 does not variably display the normal patterns, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play the game before the progress control of the game is started.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, error notification is not performed even if various errors occur. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that cheating is performed before the game progress control is started.

The setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step 850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S85-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 39, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the normal base value calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball The counting process may be executed within the input control process which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 39a, it consists of a game ball that has entered the general winning port 43, the first start port 45, the second start port 47, and the second big winning port 56, and the game ball that has flowed into the out port 39. Instead of detecting the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, whenever a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the second big winning opening detecting switch 56a, The number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) should be incremented by one.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 40, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated after setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 , status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has passed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 41, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 , status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

The specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 is the same as the specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 in the case of initializing the various drive sources after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the second big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Since various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, the board surface Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of factory shipment (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is activated. Information display device 69 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification is performed to prompt confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, the movable body that affects the game result is operated. Since the various drive sources are designed to be initialized, it is not necessary to check the operation of the various drive sources while changing the settings (setting confirmation). becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is completed and after the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. As a result, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the setting confirmation mode, However, since the same initial action notification is performed, the control of the initial action notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the game machine 1 can be reduced (development period shortened, etc.). It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is kept turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the second big winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, the main control board 110 is not burdened with unnecessary processing, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the game progress control is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

Further, according to this embodiment, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the setting values and performance information of the game machine are not displayed on the information display 113. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

In this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the setting confirmation mode.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 42, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, assistance in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 A game operation, an auxiliary game operation in a time-saving game state) are compared.

The number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the total driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

The total drive time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is shorter during the initial operation than during the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is replaced by the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is changed to the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to a value greater than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to one driving time at the time of the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R), the total It may be the same value as the driving time or almost the same (similar) value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation, the driving time of one time, and the total driving time is set to be greater than the driving time of one time and the total driving time during the jackpot game operation. value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(First modification)
A first modification of the initial operation of various driving sources will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 43 to 50. FIG. In the first modification, the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clearing switch 111a is operated again, and the driving source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clearing process. Since it differs from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, portions that are the same as those of the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 34 are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and only different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for changing (updating) the set value (probability of judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned The drive source initial operation process (game program) is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing other than the set value region of the RWM region for game), and the drive source initial operation processing described above (game program) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, the process for displaying the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and the drive source initial operation process described above are performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the portions that match the setting change processing of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 35, and the description thereof is omitted, and only the different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S19-12a. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated. Processing for initial operation is performed until the setting change mode ends. Details of initial operations of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S19-13.

In step S19-17a, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources when the setting change mode is terminated by the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change processing.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated. Processing for initial operation is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 an RWM clear designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized in step S24-6. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the above-described RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources in response to termination of the RWM clear preparation mode by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to portions that match the setting confirmation processing of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 37, and description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S28-4a. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated. Processing for initial operation is performed until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various driving sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S28-5.

In step S28-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S28-4a.

In step S28-7a, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources when the setting confirmation mode is terminated by the confirmation end operation, and ends the current setting confirmation process.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 47, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when initializing various driving sources during setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 , status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source are repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the setting value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 , status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 49, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 , status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources immediately stops (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources ends, and the display of the set values on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols pending, display of normal symbols pending, etc.) are started, and the power restoration notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the second big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Since various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, the board surface Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of factory shipment (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is displayed. Information display device 69 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various drive sources. (Setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources) for the purpose of the game. It is possible to inform the workers (workers, game shop clerks) who check the operation of the machine 1, so that they can appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modification, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so that the progress control of the game It is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the start of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the various drive sources are immediately activated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. To avoid the inconvenience of confusion with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of a game, since the initial actions of various drive sources are not performed in a game-enabled state because the operation is terminated. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains extinguished. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large prize winning opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the second large prize winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, the main control board 110 is not burdened with unnecessary processing, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, in this modified example, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, a setting change screen displaying the characters "setting change in progress" is displayed. Alternatively, a setting changing screen may be displayed on which characters such as "driving source initial operation" or "please check solenoid operation" prompting visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources are displayed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 50, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, assistance in normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in board unit 500 A game operation, an auxiliary game operation in a time-saving game state) are compared.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b at the time of the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, one drive time of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, even if the driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). good. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation may be set to a value longer than the driving time of the big winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
A second modified example of the initial operation of various driving sources will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. In addition, in the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the state confirmation display 68 is not provided, and the RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S16. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S23 assuming that the mode is to be shifted to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S18 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S23 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S18. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the RWM clear preparation mode , and the process proceeds to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, a process for executing power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S22. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying the variable image 51 (described later) and the reserved image 52 (described later) on the image display device is performed. Become. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S25. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. .

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process for initializing various drive sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, permits all interrupts to start control of the progress of the game. , the current initial setting process ends.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 ), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the second big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Since various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, the board surface Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of factory shipment (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

In addition, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the RWM clear preparation mode is finished, various types of movable bodies that affect the game result can be operated. Since the drive source is initially operated, it is possible to perform the operation check appropriately without the complicated operation of checking the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the completion of the RWM clear preparation mode and the waiting time for operation, the operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the RWM clear approval operation to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains extinguished. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large prize winning opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the second large prize winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, the main control board 110 is not burdened with unnecessary processing, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification Since the operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation and the auxiliary game operation in the time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 48, the explanation here is omitted.

(Third modification)
A third modification of the initial operation of various driving sources will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. The third modification differs from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. This is the second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 51, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be explained.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated. Processing for initial operation is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources, and in step S27, initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 ), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the second big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Since various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, the board surface Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of factory shipment (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it is confirmed that the RWM clearing preparation is in progress and the operation of the various drive sources is confirmed. Since the RWM clear preparation notification is provided to prompt the operator, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources. It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so the progress control of the game is started. There is no need to create a plurality of states in the previous pre-start state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the RWM clear approval operation is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources elapses. As a result, the initial operations of various driving sources are not performed in a game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operations of various driving sources according to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains extinguished. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large prize winning opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the second large prize winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, the main control board 110 is not burdened with unnecessary processing, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In this modified example, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, a clear preparation screen displaying the characters "Preparing for RWM clear" was displayed. In addition to the text, you can also display a clear preparation screen that displays the text "Driving source initial operation" or "Please check solenoid operation" to visually confirm the initial operation of various driving sources. good.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the third modification Since the operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation and the auxiliary game operation in the time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 50, the explanation here is omitted.

(Fourth modification)
A fourth modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. The fourth modification differs from the first embodiment in that it does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and differs from the second modification in that the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode. Since there are differences, only the differences from the first embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 51, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be explained.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S25. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated. A process for performing an initial operation is performed over a predetermined period. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting opening opening/closing member 48 and second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) are stopped. there is

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, Second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67 ), the first image display device 70, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 performs RWM clearing and the game progress control is started. The previous pre-start state is entered. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation waiting time (here, 7 seconds) has passed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T5, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the third time, and at the timing of T7, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed. The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the second big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Since various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, the board surface Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of factory shipment (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, after the RWM clear operation is performed and the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the RWM clear operation to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains extinguished. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the second large winning opening is open. Since the opening signal is not output, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and to collect information such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the device collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in board unit 500 in the fourth modification The operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation, the auxiliary game operation in the time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 42, so the explanation here is omitted.

In addition, in the first embodiment (including modifications), the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, and it is possible to shoot the game ball. However, by transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes ready for play.

In addition, in the first embodiment (including modifications), the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine installed in parallel, but after the progress control of the game is started and the game is ready to play, the ball lending machine will not be able to play. A game ball may be put out (ball lending) based on a put-out request.

In addition, in the first embodiment (including modifications), backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c). Although there is no unpaid ball number data remaining in the RAM 121c), backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c). If the number of balls to be paid out remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c) when the switch is turned ON, the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c) even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. The payout of game balls based on the payout ball number data may be possible.

Also, in the first embodiment (including modifications), the main information display 69 is provided outside the game area 5 a , but the main information display 69 may be provided inside the game area 5 .

In addition, in the first embodiment (including modifications), prize balls (prize value) are given based on establishment of granting conditions (winning of game balls to winning opening, starting opening, big winning opening) However, it is also possible to manage the player's possession balls as data, and give the winning ball data (addition to the possession ball data).

[Variation effect pattern table]
57 and 58 are diagrams showing setting examples of the variable effect pattern table used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 28(b). In addition, FIG. 57 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low probability time saving no-game state, and FIG.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for big win shown in FIG. For the variation patterns “PA1” to “PA6”, “PB1” to “PB14”, and “PC1 to PC2” set using FIG. 21 above, the variation production patterns “EA1” to “EA6”, “ EB1” to “EB14” and “EC1 to EC2” are associated on a one-to-one basis.
In addition, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for small hits and losses shown in FIG. With respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. are mapped.

Here, the variable effect is the effect of notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not the player has won a big hit) by displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the stationary symbols.
Further, in the variable performance pattern shown in the drawing, "pseudo-continuous times", "normal", "SP reach", and "SPSP reach" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number" is the number of pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-runs). This pseudo-continuous production is a production that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols is being performed in the variable display of the special symbols for one variation. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 temporarily stops the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols before entering the ready-to-win state, and then restarts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed. End the variable display.
Here, the term "temporary stop" refers to a pseudo-stopped state in which the decorative patterns appear to be stopped at first glance, but actually the patterns are slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols is treated as a continuous variation in terms of game control. Temporary stop is, for example, a state in which the variation speed of the decorative pattern 41 becomes "0", the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed, and for example, it slightly shakes or expands or contracts.
Further, the determination and stoppage of the decorative symbols means a state in which the special symbols are determined as the stopped symbols in the variable display for one variation of the special symbols. Note that the temporary stop of the decorative pattern may include complete stop display for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the number of pseudo-consecutive wins is set in association with the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. That is, it is set so that the greater the number of times of pseudo-consecutive games, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

"Normal" indicates the type of ready-to-win effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", "N3", and "N4" is executed as the type of ready-to-win effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", "SP3", and "SP4" is executed as the type of SP ready-to-win effect. In the order of "SP1", "SP2", "SP3", and "SP4", the higher the number, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

"SPSP reach" indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2" and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. Also, "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" are set in order such that the higher the number, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG.
For example, in FIG. 57, when the "big win symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. Then, in this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number" is "1", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. Also, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

〔image〕
Next, an image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59-1, an image is displayed on the image display section 114 under the control of the effect control section 300 . In the present embodiment, the image displayed on image display portion 114 includes decorative pattern 41 . The image display unit 114 also displays a moving image 51, a pending image 52, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, a returning image 62, a menu display explanation image 63, a volume image 64, a customer waiting image 65, Initializing image 66, initialization complete image 67, SP reach image 68, SPSP reach image 69, opening image 70, right shot image 71, round in progress image 72, music selection image 73, number of rounds image 74, number of points image 75 , high-precision fanning image 76, high-precision notification image 77, character selection image 79, high-precision start image 80, game continuation instruction image 81, notice image 82, hitting right during return image 83, jackpot notification image 84, game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, a right hitting instruction image 87, a winning eye image 88, and a button operation image 89 may be displayed.
Each of the above images will be described below.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 59-1(1), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114 . In this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is composed of three patterns. The three patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. When the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side will be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center as the "middle decorative pattern 41", The pattern arranged on the right side is called a "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41". Furthermore, when collectively describing the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41, they will be referred to as "three decorative designs 41".

In the variable rendering of the decorative symbols 41, the effect control unit 300 variably displays the three decorative symbols 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling. Next, the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "3") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "1") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped. Incidentally, the combination "213" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 59-1 (1)) in which a character image is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers, and a There is also a low-decorative display mode (see FIG. 63-2 (10)) that mainly displays characters such as . Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change of the game state, the progress of the production, or the like. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in SP reach production, SPSP reach production, and high probability time-saving gaming state, etc. In other cases such as the low decorative pattern 41 Is displayed.

(Variation image 51)
As shown in FIG. 62(1), the image display unit 114 displays that the special symbol is fluctuating (decorative symbol 41 is fluctuating displayed) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A variation image 51 shown is displayed. Then, the variable image 51 starts to be displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion of the display area of the image display unit 114) when the special symbol starts to vary, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variation image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation image 51 is based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process by changing the display mode of the color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "color etc."), for example. may indicate or suggest

(Holding image 52)
As shown in FIG. 62(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). In other words, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the display screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
A holding base is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes.

In addition, the pending image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as the color based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example. Here, the display mode such as the color of the pending image 52 is set so that the type of display mode with a higher degree of expectation in the case where the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process is a big hit than in the case of a loss. there is For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expectations may be set higher in this order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suspended image 52 and the variable image 51 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the form may differ between the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 or between the plurality of reserved images 52 depending on the content of the effect or the progress of the effect.

In the following description, of the four pending images 52 displayed at maximum, the "first pending image 52", the "second pending image 52", and the "third Reserved image 52" and "fourth reserved image 52".

(hold number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 62(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 .

(small pattern 56)
Here, the display position, display size, design, and the like of the decorative pattern 41 may change, for example, as the variable effect progresses. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be entirely or partially hidden by the movable accessory 115 that is movable with respect to the display screen of the image display section 114 . In such a case, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbols originally intended to inform the player that the special symbols are being variably displayed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56 on the display screen of the image display unit 114, the player is informed that the special pattern is being variably displayed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56, the notification of the determination result of the big hit by the decorative pattern 41 and the type of the big winning pattern indicated by the decorative pattern 41 are assisted. .
In the embodiment, the small pattern 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display section 114 in such a manner that the player can always see it. In other words, the small pattern 56 is not entirely or partially hidden by other images, the movable accessory 115, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 62 ( 1 ), the small pattern 56 is composed of three patterns corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 . The three patterns forming the small pattern 56 are arranged vertically. The small pattern 56 is displayed as an image whose display size is smaller than that of the decorative pattern 41 . Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a low decorative display mode. Only displayed in However, the small pattern 56 may also be displayed in a highly decorative display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 62(1), three patterns forming the small pattern 56 are arranged in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, three patterns forming the small pattern 56 may be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

Also, the number of patterns forming the small pattern 56 does not have to match the number of patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 . For example, when the number of patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 is three (three digits), the number of patterns forming the small pattern 56 may be one (one digit).
Further, the small patterns 56 are not limited to one pair provided in the image display section 114 with three patterns as one pair. For example, two or more pairs of small patterns 56 may be displayed simultaneously on the image display section 114 .

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 59-1(1), the image display section 114 displays a stage image 61 as a background of the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61 . The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when a variable effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variable effect (for example, a variable effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed) is performed.

(Returning image 62)
As shown in FIG. 59-1(4), the image display section 114 displays a returning image 62 . This recovering image 62 is an image for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from the power-off state. In the illustrated example, the text "recovering" is displayed as the recovering image 62. FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 100 completes recovery from the power-off state, the recovery image 62 is hidden.

(Menu display explanation image 63)
As shown in FIG. 59-2(7), the image display section 114 displays a menu display explanation image 63. FIG. This menu display explanation image 63 is an image for explaining a method for displaying the menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which items of effects that can be set by the player are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display explanation image 63 displays an image simulating the effect button 161 and the text "Display menu screen with button".

(Volume image 64)
As shown in FIG. 59-2(7), the volume image 64 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This volume image 64 is an image showing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 . In the illustrated example, in the volume image 64, the level of the currently set volume level among a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level is indicated by a gauge. The volume image 64 also shows an image imitating the speaker 156 . When the player operates the effect key 162, the volume output from the speaker 156 is adjusted, and the volume image 64 shows a gauge of stages corresponding to the adjusted volume.

(Customer waiting image 65)
As shown in FIG. 59-2(8), a customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This customer waiting image 65 is, for example, an image related to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The customer waiting image 65 is displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

(Initializing image 66)
As shown in FIG. 60-1(4), the image display section 114 displays an initialization-in-progress image 66 . This initialization in progress image 66 is an image that notifies that the restoration from initialization is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "initializing" is displayed as the image 66 during initialization. When the restoration from initialization is completed, the image 66 during initialization disappears.

(Initialization completion image 67)
As shown in FIG. 60-2(5), the image display section 114 displays an initialization completion image 67. FIG. This initialization completion image 67 is an image for notifying that the restoration from initialization has been completed. In the illustrated example, the text "initialized" is displayed as the initialization completion image 67. FIG.

(SP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 63-2(10), the SP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. This SP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 69)
As shown in FIG. 63-2(11), the SPSP reach image 69 is displayed on the image display unit 114. FIG. This SPSP ready-to-reach image 69 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Opening image 70)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(10), an opening image 70 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This opening image 70 is an image for informing the player of the start of the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Configurations" is displayed as the opening image 70 . The opening image 70 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished.

(right shot image 71)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (10), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71. As shown in FIG. The right hitting image 71 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, as the right-handed shot image 71, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed. The right hitting image 71 is displayed, for example, during execution of a jackpot game or in a time-saving game state.

(Image 72 during the round)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(11), the image display section 114 displays the in-round image 72. FIG. This in-round image 72 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The in-round image 72 is displayed during a round in the jackpot game.

(Music selection image 73)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(11), the image display section 114 displays a song selection image 73. FIG. This song selection image 73 is an image for selecting a song to be output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, “song A” is selected in the song selection image 73 . When the player operates the production key 162 to select a song, the selected song is output from the speaker 156 and the name of the selected song is displayed on the song selection image 73 .

(Round number image 74)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(11), the image display section 114 displays a round number image 74. FIG. This round number image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the round number of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 74. FIG.

(Point number image 75)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(11), the image display section 114 displays a point number image 75. FIG. The point number image 75 is an image for notifying the player of the number of prize balls that have entered the big prize opening 125 in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "50pt" is displayed as the point number image 75 .

(High accuracy inciting image 76)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(12), the image display section 114 displays a high-accuracy tilted image 76. FIG. This high-probability agitation image 76 is an image that agitates whether or not the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving game state. The high-precision teasing image 76 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(High accuracy notification image 77)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a high-precision notification image 77. FIG. This high-precision notification image 77 is an image that suggests or notifies that the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving game state.

(Character selection image 79)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (16), the image display section 114 displays a character selection image 79. FIG. This character selection image 79 is an image for the player to select a character that appears in the effect after the end of the jackpot game. In the character selection image 79, a character corresponding to the operation of the effect key 162 by the player is displayed.

(High accuracy start image 80)
As shown in FIG. 64-3 (17), the image display unit 114 displays a high-probability start image 80. FIG. This high-probability start image 80 is an image that notifies the start of the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the high-probability start image 80 is displayed with the text "Enter Excite Mode!!".

(Game continuation instruction image 81)
As shown in FIG. 65-2(5), the game continuation instruction image 81 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the player to continue playing the game. More specifically, the game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the continuation of the game that the player was playing before the pachinko gaming machine 100 was turned off. In the illustrated example, as the game continuation instruction image 81, the text "Please continue the game" is displayed. Note that the game continuation instruction image 81 may be an image that notifies that the game is in progress, such as a text saying "The game is being played".

(Preview image 82)
As shown in FIG. 66-2(9), the preview image 82 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This notice image 82 is an image for notifying that there is a possibility of winning a big win in the variation performance subsequent to the variation being executed. In the illustrated example, the preview image 82 is displayed with the text "A chance in the next change!?" The preview image 82 is displayed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.

(Right shot image 83 during recovery)
As shown in FIG. 67-2(11), the image display unit 114 displays a returning hitting right image 83. As shown in FIG. The hitting right image 83 during recovery is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 while the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from the power-off state. . The image 83 of striking to the right during returning in the present embodiment differs in display mode from the striking to the right image 71 (see FIG. 64-2 (10)). More specifically, the hitting-to-right image 83 during recovery displays a thicker arrow mark than the hitting-to-right image 71 . In addition, the text "Right shot" is displayed in the right shot image 83 during recovery.

(Jackpot notification image 84)
As shown in FIG. 68(3), the image display section 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84 . This jackpot notification image 84 is an image that suggests or notifies that a jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, as the jackpot notification image 84, the text "jackpot in progress" is displayed.

(Game start notification image 85)
As shown in FIG. 68(3), a game start notification image 85 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This game start notification image 85 is an image that suggests or notifies that a game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the game start notification image 85 is displayed with the text "The game has started."

(Game execution instruction image 86)
As shown in FIG. 68(3), a game execution instruction image 86 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This game execution instruction image 86 is an image for instructing the player to play a game. In the illustrated example, the game execution instruction image 86 displays the text "Play a game".

(Right shot instruction image 87)
As shown in FIG. 68( 3 ), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed instruction image 87 . This right hitting instruction image 87 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, the text "Please hit right" is displayed as the right hitting instruction image 87. FIG.

(Hit image 88)
As shown in FIG. 64-2(11), the image display section 114 displays a winning eye image 88. FIG. This winning image 88 is an image showing the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 combined in the variable performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the number "6" is displayed.

(Button operation image 89)
As shown in FIG. 71-1(6), the image display section 114 displays a button operation image 89. FIG. By displaying this button operation image 89 , the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161 . In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 89 .

[Production example]
In this embodiment, various effects are executed. For example, examples of effects include a change effect, a chance display effect, a high-precision fan effect, a high-precision notification effect, a high-precision start notification effect, a next change expectation effect, an operation effect, and a character action effect. Each performance will be described below.

(Change production)
The change effect is, as shown in FIG. 63-1(2), a effect of changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the pending image 52. FIG. More specifically, the change effect is a effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “display color, etc.”) of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 . In this embodiment, by changing the display color or the like of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is notified or suggested to the player. The change effect can be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In the illustrated example, one of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red" and "gold" is selected as the display color. For example, in the order of blue, yellow, green, red, and gold, the final display color of the variation image may be set such that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation. In the illustrated example, the third pending image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

(Chance eye display effect)
The chance eye display effect is an effect of displaying a chance eye as shown in FIG. 63-1(3). Here, the chance eye is three decorative patterns 41 combined with different patterns of the same color. The chance eye display effect informs or suggests, for example, that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the next and subsequent special symbol variable displays. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in blue by the chance eye display effect.

(high-precision provocation)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (12), the high-probability inciting effect is an effect inciting whether or not the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving game state. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed.

(high-precision notification performance)
High certainty notification effect, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (13), the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game, suggesting or notifying that the high probability time-saving game state. In the high-precision notification effect, a high-precision notification image 77 is displayed.

(High-precision start notification production)
High certainty start notification production, as shown in FIG. 64-3 (17), is a production to notify the start of the high probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-probability start notification effect, a high-probability start image 80 is displayed.

(Next change expectation production)
The next variation expectation performance is, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (9), a performance that makes the player expect to win the jackpot in the variation after the variation being executed. This next change expectation effect is an example of the advance notice effect. In the next change expectation effect, a notice image 82 is displayed.

(Operation production)
The operation effect, as shown in FIG. 71-1(6), is a effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. FIG. In the operation effect, a button operation image 89 is displayed.

(Performance of character action)
As shown in FIG. 71-1(7), the character action effect is an effect in which the movable character 115 moves to the front side of the image display section 114 to cover the whole or part of the image display area of the image display section 114. be. In addition, the movable accessory 115 may emit light as a role product motion effect. In addition, the movable accessory 115 may move to a position different from the front side of the image display section 114 as a role product motion effect. In addition, as a role object action effect, the movable role object 115 may emit light without moving.

[Fluctuation ramp and holding ramp]
Next, the variation ramp and the suspension ramp of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 110 is provided with a first variation lamp 133 and a second variation lamp 134 indicating that the special symbol is in the process of variation. The first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 have LED light sources capable of lighting with a predetermined emission color, and are controlled by the effect control section 300 .
The first fluctuation ramp 133 corresponds to the first starting port 121 . Also, the second fluctuation ramp 134 corresponds to the second starting port 122 .

A variable display is realized by continuing a state in which the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 are repeatedly turned on and off in a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. When the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 of the display device 130, the special symbol variably displayed on the first variation lamp 133 is performed. Further, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 222 of the display device 130, the variative display for the special symbol is performed on the second variation lamp 134. FIG.

Further, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 221, the first variation lamp 133 for the first special pattern remains illuminated in a display color (for example, red) suggesting the jackpot. Similarly, when the second special symbol display 222 stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the second variation lamp 134 remains illuminated in a display color (for example, red) suggesting the jackpot.
In this embodiment, the first variable lamp 133 or the second variable lamp 134 is displayed variable and stopped along with the variable display and stop display of the special symbols. However, as described above, the first variation lamp 133 or the second variation lamp 134 operates the LED light source in such a manner that the player cannot recognize the type of decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 are variably displayed and statically displayed in such a manner that the player can recognize the type of the decorative symbols along with the variable display and static display of the special symbols. Similarly, the small symbols 56 displayed on the image display unit 114 are variably displayed and statically displayed in such a way that the player can recognize the type of the decorative symbols along with the variable display and static display of the special symbols.
On the other hand, the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 of the present embodiment cause the LED light source to emit light in such a manner that the player cannot recognize the type of decorative symbol accompanying the variable display and stop display of the special symbol. . That is, the first variation lamp 133 and the second variation lamp 134 simply inform the player that the decorative symbols are varying.

By the way, in this embodiment, for example, even if a problem occurs in the display of the decorative pattern 41 or the small pattern 56 on the image display unit 114, the special pattern is displayed by the first variation lamp 133 or the second variation lamp 134. It is guaranteed that the player will be notified that the is fluctuating as an effect. However, when trying to strictly display the types of decorative patterns by the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134, for example, the lighting of the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 according to the number of types of decorative patterns It is necessary to prepare pattern variations and light the first variation lamp 133 and the second variation lamp 134 according to the plurality of variations. As a result, the load on the ramp control section 320 that controls the first variable ramp 133 and the second variable ramp 134 increases, and the load on the effect control section 300 that controls the ramp control section 320 increases.
Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first variation lamp 133 and the second variation lamp 134 are not made to notify the type of the decorative pattern, and the minimum function is to notify that the decorative pattern is fluctuating. I'm trying

However, apart from the viewpoint of reducing the load of image control described above, for example, the functions of the first variation lamp 133 and the second variation lamp 134 may be performed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 . That is, the functions of the first fluctuation lamp 133 and the second fluctuation lamp 134 may be realized by the display image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the game board 110 is provided with a first suspension lamp 135 and a second suspension lamp 136 indicating that suspension is occurring. The first reservation lamp 135 and the second reservation lamp 136 have LED light sources capable of lighting with a predetermined emission color, and are controlled by the effect control section 300 .
The first holding lamp 135 corresponds to the first starting port 121 . Also, the second holding lamp 136 corresponds to the second starting port 122 .

Then, the presence or absence of a hold and the number of holds are suggested by being displayed in a predetermined lighting mode on the first hold lamp 135 and the second hold lamp 136 . When the first special symbol reservation indicator 218 of the indicator 130 operates in a lighting mode indicating a predetermined number of reservations, the first reservation lamp 135 operates in a lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of reservations. Also, when the second special symbol reservation indicator 219 of the indicator 130 operates in a lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of reservations, the second reservation lamp 136 operates in a lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of reservations.

Note that the functions of the first reservation lamp 135 and the second reservation lamp 136 may be performed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 . That is, the functions of the first reservation lamp 135 and the second reservation lamp 136 may be realized by the display image.

59-1 and 59-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the game control section 200 and the effect control section 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2, processing performed by the game control section 200 and the performance control section 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state will be specifically described. Incidentally, the processing of the effect control unit 300 shown in FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2 is a command (see FIG. 25-2) for controlling the power-on at the time of restoration is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. It is done by

(Processing example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), the production control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol. Assume that a certain "213" is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 , a small pattern 56 , and a stage image 61 . Also, at this time, both the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicate "0", and "213", which is the small pattern 56, is confirmed and stopped.

Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first variation lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. At this time, predetermined BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . This BGM is BGM determined according to the type of the stage image 61 .
Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emit white light. Note that the movable accessory 115, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 are all regarded as light emitting means capable of emitting light.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, no image is displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 59-1(2). More specifically, image display unit 114 is turned off. Also, at this time, the special symbol is extinguished in the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first variation lamp 133 is extinguished. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are all turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state. That is, in processing example 1, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59-1(3), the first special symbol display 221 stops displaying the special symbol. On the other hand, the first variable lamp 133 is kept off. In addition, the image display unit 114 also maintains the off state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. Further, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 are each maintained in the off state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59-1(4), the image display section 114 displays a returning image 62 . Also, at this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 59-2(5), the image display section 114 displays "315" which is the decorative pattern 41. FIG. Also, the image display portion 114 displays “315” which is the small pattern 56 . In addition, a pending number display 55 is displayed on the image display section 114 . Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61 . That is, the same stage image 61 as that immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters the power-off state is displayed. At this time, non-initialization return processing is performed. In the non-initialization return process, each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 emits blue light. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59-2(6), non-initialization test operation processing is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C descend so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. Also, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 moves from the non-protruding state to the protruding state. The operation of the movable accessory 115 in the non-initialization test operation process is the same as the movable effect device 73 (the first movable member 73a, the 2 is an example of the initial operation of the movable member 73b). Also, at this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed. Also, at this time, the non-initialization return process is continuously performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (7), the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C rise respectively, and the production button 161 returns from the projected state to the non-projected state. , the uninitialized test operation process is completed. A menu display explanation image 63 and a volume image 64 are also displayed on the image display unit 114 . Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit white light. That is, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit light when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state. returns to the previous light emission mode. The light emission mode before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is hereinafter referred to as the normal light emission mode. This normal light emission mode includes a light emission mode when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in a power-off state. In other words, the normal light emission mode is the light emission mode of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the initialization return and the non-initialization return are not performed.
Further, the operation mode before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is hereinafter referred to as a normal operation mode. This normal operation mode includes an operation mode when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in a power-off state. In other words, the normal operation mode is the operation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the initialization return and non-initialization return are not performed. Here, the normal light emission mode is an example of the normal operation mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(8), a customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off.

In addition, although processing example 1 explained that the first variation lamp 133 is stop-displayed while the returning image 62 is being displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first variable lamp 133 may be stop-displayed after the returning image 62 is displayed. Also, for example, when the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Further, after the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 221, and then the first variation lamp 133 may be stop-displayed. That is, after the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 221, the first variation lamp 133 may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the processing example 1, regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, the effect button 161 is operated in the non-initialization test operation process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may operate when the player operates the effect button 161 .

(Processing example 2)
60-1 and 60-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the game control section 200 and the performance control section 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2, another specific example (processing example 2) will be explained.
Note that, in the following description, differences from the processing example 1 will be mainly described, and descriptions of the points that are the same as the processing example 1 may be omitted. In addition, the processing of the effect control unit 300 shown in FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2 is a command (see FIG. 25-2) for controlling the power-on when clearing the RAM is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. It is done by being

First, as shown in FIG. 60-1 (1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, "213", which is the decorative symbol 41, is displayed on the screen of the image display unit 114. has been permanently stopped. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first variation lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit white light.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 60-1(2). Also, at this time, the special symbol is extinguished in the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first variation lamp 133 is extinguished. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are all turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state. That is, in the processing example 2, initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-1(3), the first special symbol display 221 stops displaying the special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60-1(4), the image display section 114 displays an image 66 during initialization. Also, at this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2(5), the image display section 114 displays "753" which is the decorative pattern 41. FIG. In addition, the image display portion 114 displays "753" which is the small pattern 56. FIG. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61 . That is, the same stage image 61 as that immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters the power-off state is displayed. At this time, an initialization completion image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114 . Also, at this time, an initialization notification process is performed. In the initialization notification process, it is notified by voice that the initialization process has been performed. More specifically, in the initialization notification process, a voice "initialized" is output from the speaker 156, and a warning sound is output following this voice. At this time, initialization return processing is performed. In the initialization return process, each of the left movable accessory 115A, middle movable accessory 115B, right movable accessory 115C, frame lamp 157, board lamp 116, and effect button 161 emits red light. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (6), initialization test operation processing is performed. In the initialization test operation process, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C descend so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. In addition, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 moves from the non-protruding state to the protruding state and vibrates. The operation of the movable accessory 115 in the initialization test operation process is the movable effect device 73 (the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73a, the It is an example of the initial operation of the member 73b). At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Also, at this time, the initialization return process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (7), the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C rise respectively, and the effect button 161 changes from the projected state to the non-projected state. Returning, the initialization test operation process is completed. At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Also, at this time, the initialization return process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed.

Then, when the third initialization notification process is completed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 60-2(8). That is, when sound is no longer output from speaker 156, menu display explanation image 63 and volume image 64 are displayed. Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit white light. That is, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all return to the normal light emission mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-3(9), a customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output from the time the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. In other words, in the speaker 156, when the lighting modes of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 change to the normal lighting mode, Since then, the state in which no sound is output is maintained.

In addition, in the processing example 2, regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, the effect button 161 moves in the initialization test operation process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may move when the player operates the effect button 161 .

Further, in the processing example 2, it has been explained that the initialization notification processing is started when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the initialization notification process may be started while the initialization-in-progress image 66 is being displayed. That is, the initialization notification process may be performed before the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed. Then, when the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed, the initialization notification process is completed, and the sound may not be output from the speaker 156 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 operates the frame lamp 157 and the like in a different operation mode from the case where the non-initialization return is performed when the initialization return is performed. It should be noted that the return from initialization can be regarded as the first return accompanied by the initialization of information stored in the RAM 203 . A non-initialization return is regarded as a second return that does not involve initialization of information stored in the RAM 203 . Also, the frame lamp 157 is an example of an effect means for executing an effect. Furthermore, each of the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 can also be regarded as production means.

In this case, for example, the clerk of the hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed confirms the operation mode when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored from the power-off state, thereby resetting to initialization and non-initialization. It is possible to recognize which of has been performed. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 228 turned off in spite of the purpose of resetting the pachinko gaming machine 100, the hall clerk changes the operation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 100. After confirming, it can be recognized that the initialization restoration is not performed, and the initialization restoration can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from continuing to be uninitialized even though the hall clerk intends to reset it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the production control unit 300 operates the production button 161 and the movable accessory 115 in a special operation mode different from that in the non-initialization return when the initialization return is performed. When the performance control unit 300 changes the operation mode of the performance button 161 from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode, the operation mode of the movable accessory 115 is also changed from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode. Note that the special operation mode is the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 when resetting is performed. Also, the effect button is regarded as an operating means that can be operated by the player.

In this case, when the operation mode of one of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 changes to the normal operation mode, the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 does not change compared to the case where the other operation mode does not change. Since the change is conspicuous, the change in the operation mode of the production button 161 and the movable accessory 115 is easily recognized. Therefore, it becomes easy to confirm the operations of the performance button 161 and the movable accessory 115 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resetting is performed, at least part of the frame lamp 157 and at least part of the board lamp 116 emit light in a special light emission mode different from that when non-initialization reset is performed, When the lighting mode of at least part of the frame lamp 157 changes from the special lighting mode to the normal lighting mode, the lighting mode of at least part of the board lamp 116 also changes from the special lighting mode to the normal lighting mode.

In this case, when the light emission mode of one of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes to the normal light emission mode, the change in the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 is less than when the light emission mode of the other does not change. The conspicuous part makes it easier to recognize the change in the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 . Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state, it becomes easy to confirm the light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 causes at least one movable accessory 115 out of the plurality of movable accessories 115 to move in the same manner in the case where the reset to initialization is performed and the case in which the non-initialization reset is performed. At least one movable accessory 115 out of the plurality of movable accessories 115 is operated in different modes depending on whether the initialization return is performed or the non-initialization return. In addition, each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C is regarded as a movable part. Further, in a broad sense, the production button 161 can also be regarded as a movable part.

In this case, the movable accessory 115 can be caused to perform a test operation necessary for returning the pachinko gaming machine 100 from the power-off state, regardless of whether the initialization return or the non-initialization return is performed. On the other hand, for example, a store clerk at a hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed can recognize which of the initialization return and the non-initialization return has been performed by confirming the operation mode of the movable accessory 115. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 are synchronized with each other in the timing at which the light emission mode changes to the normal light emission mode during the initialization return process. ing.
In this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the lighting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 has changed to the normal lighting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stage image 61 (see FIG. 59-2 (5)) displayed when non-initialization return is performed, and the stage image 61 displayed when initialization return is performed ( 60-2 (5)) is the same. On the other hand, the initialization image 66 is displayed when the initialization return is performed, but this initialization image 66 is not displayed when the non-initialization return is performed. That is, when resetting is performed, an image, which is not displayed when resetting is not performed, is displayed after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off until the stage image 61 is displayed.
In this case, the store clerk in the hall can recognize which of the initialization return and the non-initialization return has been performed by checking the display contents of the image display unit 114 .

It should be noted that even in the case where resetting is performed, the resetting image 62 may be displayed instead of the resetting image 66 before the stage image 61 is displayed. In this case, in addition to the returning image 62, an image suggesting or notifying that the initialization process is being performed may be displayed. Further, the display contents on the image display unit 114 until the stage image 61 is displayed may be the same between the case where the initialization return is performed and the case where the non-initialization return is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 is changed to the normal lighting mode at the timing when a specific image is displayed. Here, the specific image includes, for example, the menu display explanation image 63, the volume image 64, and the like.
In this case, even if a specific image is displayed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being erroneously recognized as being abnormal due to the fact that the light emission mode of each light emission means does not become the normal light emission mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, a sound that is not output when resetting is performed or when non-initialization is performed is output.
In this case, the hall clerk hears the sound output from the speaker 156 and can recognize which of the reset to initialization and the reset to non-initialization has been performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound output when resetting is performed, that is, the sound output in the initialization notification process is a specific image such as the menu display explanation image 63 or the volume image 64. It will not be output at the timing of
In this case, by continuing to output the sound generated in the initialization notification process even after the specific image is displayed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being erroneously recognized as having an abnormality.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 is set to the normal light emitting mode at the timing when the sound generated in the initialization notification process is no longer output. are changing.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the pachinko game machine 100 from being erroneously recognized as having an abnormality because the light emission mode of each light emission means does not return to the normal light emission mode even when the sound generated in the initialization notification process is no longer output. .

In the present embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 has a light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode during non-initialization return processing. , but not limited to. The light-emitting mode of each light-emitting device during the non-initialization return process may be the normal light-emitting mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 emits light in a color different from that in the non-initialization return process. but not limited to.
For example, the manner of blinking of light in each light-emitting device during the resetting process may be different from the manner of blinking of light during the non-initialization resetting process. In other words, the light emission mode during the initialization return process in each light emitting means may be made different from the light emission mode during the non-initialization return process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 have the same light emission mode in the initialization return process, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the initialization return process, at least two or more of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may have the same light emission mode, or may have different light emission modes. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 has a light emission mode during the initialization return process that is different from the light emission mode during the non-initialization return process. but not limited to.
For example, for at least one of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the light emission mode during the initialization return process is made different from the light emission mode during the non-initialization return process. may In this case, any one of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 is made to have the same light emission mode during the initialization return process as that during the non-initialization return process. can be

Further, in this embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 are synchronized with each other in the timing of changing from the light emission mode during the initialization return process to the normal light emission mode. is not limited to
For example, any two of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 change the timing from the light emission mode at the time of the initialization return process to the normal light emission mode, and the other two are the initialization return. The timing may be different from the timing of changing from the light emission mode during processing to the normal light emission mode. Also, for example, any one of the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 changes the timing of changing from the light emission mode during the initialization return process to the normal light emission mode, and the other one changes the timing during the initialization return process. may be different from the timing of changing from the light emission mode to the normal light emission mode. In addition, among the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the target for synchronizing the timing of changing from the light emission mode at the time of the initialization notification process to the normal light emission mode may be any combination. good.

Further, for example, when the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a different light emission mode during the initialization return process than in the non-initialization return process, the parts that emit light in the different light emission mode are the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp. 116 may not be the whole. That is, during the initialization return process, part of the frame lamp 157 and part of the board lamp 116 emit light in a different light emission mode from that during the non-initialization return process, and the other part of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light. may emit light in the same manner as during non-initialization return processing. In this case, the portion of the frame lamp 157 that emits light in a different light emission mode during the initialization return processing than during the non-initialization return processing can be regarded as the first light emitting portion. Further, the portion of the board lamp 116 that emits light in a different light emission mode during the initialization return processing than during the non-initialization return processing can be regarded as a second light emitting portion. Further, the timing at which the light emission mode of the first light emitting section changes from the light emission mode during the resetting process to the normal light emission mode is set to the timing at which the light emission mode of the second light emitting section changes from the light emission mode during the resetting process to the normal light emission mode. It may be synchronized with the timing.
Further, for example, when synchronizing the timing at which the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change from the light emission mode during the resetting process to the normal light emission mode with each other, the part where the timing of the change in the light emission mode is synchronized is the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 . It does not have to be the entire lamp 116 , but at least a part of the frame lamp 157 and at least a part of the board lamp 116 . That is, when synchronizing the timing at which any two or more of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 change from the light emission mode at the time of initialization return processing to the normal light emission mode, At least a part of each light emitting device may be the part where the timing of changing the light emitting mode is synchronized.

Also, in the present embodiment, the three movable accessories 115 move in the same manner in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two movable parts 115 out of the three movable parts 115 may move differently in the initialization test action process and the non-initialization test action process.

Also, in the present embodiment, each of the three movable accessories 115 has a different light emission mode between the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two movable accessories 115 out of the three movable accessories 115 may have the same lighting mode in the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process. In other words, at least one movable accessory 115 out of the three movable accessories 115 should have a different lighting mode between the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process.

(Period until customer waiting image 65 is displayed)
Next, a period from when the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved to when the customer waiting image 65 is displayed will be described.
FIG. 61 shows a period from when the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved in the processing example 1 until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed, and in the processing example 2 when the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a period from when a customer waiting image 65 is displayed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), in processing example 1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 receives power supply in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved, the image 62 during recovery (see FIG. 59-1 (4) ) is displayed. After that, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, and the non-initialization return process is started. Further, when the time T1 has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the non-initialization test operation process is started. Further, the non-initialization test operation processing is completed when the time T2 has passed since the non-initialization test operation processing was started. Further, when the time T3 has elapsed after the completion of the non-initialization test operation process, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. Also, at this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 changes to the normal light emitting mode. Further, when the time T4 has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

That is, when the non-initialization return is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T1+time T2+time T3" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed. Further, when "time T1+time T2+time T3+time T4" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(B), in the processing example 2, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is supplied with power in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved, an initialization image 66 (FIG. 60-1 ( 4) is displayed. After that, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed and the initialization return process is started. Also, at this time, the first initialization notification process is performed. Further, when the time T5 has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the initialization test operation process is started. This time T5 is equal to time T1 (see FIG. 61(A)). Further, when the time T6 has passed since the first initialization notification process was performed, the second initialization notification process is performed. Further, the initialization test operation process is completed when the time T7 has passed since the initialization test operation process was started. This time T7 is equal to time T2. Further, when the time T8 has passed since the second initialization notification process was performed, the third initialization notification process is performed. This time T8 is equal to time T6. Further, when the time T9 has passed since the third initialization notification process was performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. Also, at this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the production button 161 changes to the normal light emitting mode. Furthermore, when the time T10 has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, time T9 is equal to time T3. Also, time T10 is equal to time T4.

That is, when resetting is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T6+time T8+time T9" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed. Further, when "time T6+time T8+time T9+time T10" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, in the processing example 2, the time from the display of the decorative pattern 41 to the display of the menu display explanation image 63 is longer than that in the processing example 1, because the initialization notification process is performed. Further, in processing example 2, the time from the display of the decorative pattern 41 to the display of the customer waiting image 65 is longer than in the processing example 1, because the initialization notification process is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the image display unit 114 displays the first image when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state, and then displays the second image different from the first image. . Then, the time from the display of the first image to the display of the second image differs between the case where the initialization return is performed and the case where the non-initialization return is performed. Note that the first image includes, for example, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, and the like. Further, examples of the second image include a menu display explanation image 63, a sound volume image 64, a customer waiting image 65, and the like.
In this case, for example, the hall clerk recognizes which of the reset to initialization and the reset to non-initialization has been performed by confirming the time from when the first image is displayed to when the second image is displayed. can do.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, compared to the case where the non-initialization return is performed, the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed by the amount of the initialization notification processing performed. It takes a long time until is displayed.
In this case, for example, by displaying the second image during the initialization notification process, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from forgetting to check the initialization notification process by paying attention to the second image.

In this embodiment, when non-initialization return is performed, it is explained that the state in which no sound is output is maintained after the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a non-initialization return is performed, a sound may be output to suggest or notify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has returned from the power-off state. The sound output in this case may be made different from the sound output in the initialization notification process. Also, in this case, in the initialization notification process, the notification period that the initialization process has been performed suggests or notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has recovered from the power-off state when the non-initialization return is performed. You may make it longer than the period which carries out. Here, the notification period that the initialization process has been performed in the initialization notification process is longer than the period for suggesting or notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has recovered from the power-off state when the non-initialization return is performed. Also, when the non-initialization return is performed, neither the suggestion nor the notification that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has returned from the power-off state is included. In addition, the number of times of notification that the initialization process has been performed in the initialization notification process is greater than the number of times of suggesting or notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has recovered from the power-off state when non-initialization return is performed. You may make it many.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the non-initialization return is performed, the non-initialization return processing is performed when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the non-initialization return is performed, the non-initialization return processing may be performed before the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed. Also, in this case, when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emission mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, the initialization return processing is performed when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when resetting is performed, the resetting process may be performed before the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed. Also, in this case, when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emission mode.
Further, for example, before the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, the initialization return process is performed at the start of the initialization notification process or after the start, and after the initialization notification process is completed, the frame lamp 157, The board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the lighting mode of the production button 161 may be changed to the normal lighting mode. Further, the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed when the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode. That is, the timing at which the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode and the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed may be delayed by the time the initialization notification process is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 65 is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 and the sound volume image 64 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined time has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 and volume image 64 were displayed, a power saving image is displayed to suggest or notify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power saving mode for reducing power consumption. may In this case, the power saving image is captured as the second image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described.
In addition, FIG. 62 shows a variable effect executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "ER1" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above processing examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the processing examples may be omitted.

(Variation production example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 62(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 in white. Also, at this time, a pending number display 55 and a small pattern 56 are displayed. Further, the reservation number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "4", and the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0". Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In the present embodiment, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are each displayed in a variable manner by sequentially displaying numbers "1" to "9". That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 are individually changeable. The left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. Thus, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the second, third, and fourth pending images 52 move toward the display position of the variable image 51 . Also, at this time, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the moving image 51 . In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are indicated by arrows (↓) for easy understanding. . In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 shows "3". At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .
In the example shown in FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and are moved vertically (scroll) when displayed in a variable manner. However, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 may be arranged vertically and each of them may move (scroll) in the horizontal direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(3), the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark around the decorative pattern 41 for easy understanding. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(4), the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "1", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 62(5), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 62(6). The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(7), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

In addition, in the example 1 of variation production|presentation, although it demonstrated that BGM is continuously output from the speaker 156 over the variation|variation of a some special design, it is not limited to this.
For example, the BGM output from the speaker 156 may be interrupted at the timing when the decorative pattern 41 is determined and stopped (see FIGS. 62(1) and 62(6)).

(Variation production example 2)
FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2.
It should be noted that FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2 show variable effects executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "ER3" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". executed. In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the processing examples and example 1 of variation presentation will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of processing and example 1 of variation presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 63-1(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the third pending image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1(3), when the numbers "351", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped, the chance display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in blue by the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1(4), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1(5), when the number "572", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped, a chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in green by the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (6), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1(7), when the numbers "713", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped, the chance display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in red by the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the variation image 51 is displayed in red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (9), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (10), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 68 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a small display mode and a low decorative display mode. In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display section 114 , and the right decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (11), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 69 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (12), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the number "5". At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display mode than the left and right decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (13), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (14), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

(Variation production example 3)
FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3.
Incidentally, FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3 are variable effects executed when "EB9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "EB9" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP3" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP3" is executed as "SPSP reach". executed. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 64-1(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 64-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "6", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (4), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (5), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1(6), the three decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a combination of "666" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display mode during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Also, at this time, the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 . In addition, the small pattern 56 maintains the state in which three patterns are variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1(7), the display size of the three decorative patterns 41 is reduced and temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the three decorative designs 41 are all displayed in the same display size.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1(8), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode.

Then, along with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is stopped as shown in FIG. 64-2(9). The combination "666" of the numbers of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, “666” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "666". Moreover, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2(10), an opening image 70 is displayed on the image display section 114 . A right-handed image 71 is also displayed on the image display section 114 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), when the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays the in-round image 72, the song selection image 73, the number-of-rounds image 74, and the number of points. An image 75 and a winning eye image 88 are displayed. In the in-round image 72, the character, which is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100, has its right hand lowered. In the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Also, in the point number image 75, the text "50pt" is displayed. Also, in the winning eye image 88, the number "6" is displayed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (12), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "150pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (13), a high accuracy notification effect is performed. In the high-precision notification effect, a high-precision notification image 77 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "200pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2(14), the image display section 114 displays the in-round image 72 again. In this in-round image 72, the character is raising his right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content of the moving image in the round-in-progress image 72 changes from the display content (see FIG. 64-2 (11)) before execution of the high-precision fan effect. At this time, the text "Round 3" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "300pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (15), in the in-round image 72, the character (see FIG. 64-2 (14)) in the in-round image 72 displayed during "Round 3" is A different character has his right hand down. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display contents of the in-round image 72 are further changed. At this time, the text "Round 7" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "610pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (16), a character selection image 79 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "720pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high probability start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 64-3 (17). At this time, BGM corresponding to the high-accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 64-3 (18), the decorative pattern 41 (“666”) with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114 . The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "666" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.

Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 64-3 (19), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Also, at this time, the variable pedestal is displayed in a display mode different from the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state (see, for example, FIG. 64-1 (1)). Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.

It should be noted that, in the variable effect example 3, it has been described that the sound is not output from the speaker 156 when the number "666", which is the decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. BGM may be output from the speaker 156 even when the number "666", which is the decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped.

In addition, in the variation effect example 3, the three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 64-1 (7)), and then the decorative patterns 41 with high decorativeness are displayed. Not limited.
For example, after the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game may be performed. That is, it is not necessary to use the highly decorative decorative design 41 to inform that the lottery result of the special design lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in the variable effect example 3, the BGM corresponding to the big winning game continues to flow from the speaker 156 during the round of the big winning game, but when one piece of music as the BGM is played during the round, this music is played again from the beginning. You can let it flow.

(Variation production example 4)
FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2.
It should be noted that FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2 are variable effects executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "ER2" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal". Also, in the following description, differences from the above-described processes and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processes and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (1), the production control unit 300 determines "213", which is the decorative design 41, on the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. has been suspended. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first variation lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the number of reservations is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 in a lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of reservations on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first suspension lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of suspensions for winning a prize to the first starting port 121. FIG. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, three pending images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "3". Also, at this time, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first variable lamp 133 is variably displayed. At this time, the number of reservations is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations on the first special symbol display 221. Also, at this time, the first suspension lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of suspensions for winning a prize to the first starting port 121. FIG. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 65-1(4). Also, at this time, the special symbol is extinguished in the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first fluctuation lamp 133, the first special symbol reservation display 218, and the first reservation lamp 135 are extinguished. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 .

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 4, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, a command (see FIG. 25-2) for controlling power-on at the time of recovery is transmitted from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65-2(5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the number of reservations is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations on the first special symbol display 221 . On the other hand, the first fluctuation lamp 133 and the first reservation lamp 135 remain off. In addition, the light-emitting unit 137 maintains the extinguished state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-2(6), the first variable lamp 133 is displayed variable. Also, at this time, the first suspension lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of suspensions for winning a prize to the first starting port 121. FIG. In addition, the light-emitting unit 137 maintains the extinguished state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, until the special symbols stop fluctuating, the image display unit 114, the first special symbol display device 221, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the first variation lamp 133, the first reservation lamp 135, the light emitting unit 137, and Each of the speakers 156 maintains these states.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 65-2(7), the number "315" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 stop along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “315” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, three pending images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "3". Also, at this time, the variation image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114 . Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the number of reservations is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first suspension lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of suspensions for winning a prize to the first starting port 121. FIG. In addition, the light-emitting unit 137 maintains the extinguished state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the second and third pending images 52 move toward the display position of the moving image 51 . At this time, the first reserved image 52 is moved to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "2". Also, at this time, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first variable lamp 133 is variably displayed. Also, at this time, the number of reservations is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 in a lighting manner corresponding to "2", which is the number of reservations on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first suspension lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "2", which is the number of suspensions for winning a prize to the first start port 121. FIG. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. Also, at this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first return is performed and when the second return is performed, the display content on the image display unit 114 from the return until the predetermined image is displayed on the image display unit 114 is different. Here, the first restoration is, for example, initialization restoration. Also, the second return is, for example, a non-initialization return when suspension is stored in the RAM 203 . Further, the predetermined image includes, for example, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, and the like.
In this case, before the predetermined image is displayed, it is recognized which of the return to initialization and the return to non-initialization when the suspension has occurred has been performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the return from the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the first return when the hold is not stored in the RAM 203, and the return when the hold is stored in the RAM 203. There is a second return that is The display contents on image display section 114 from the time of restoration until the predetermined image is displayed on image display section 114 are different between when the first restoration is performed and when the second restoration is performed.

In this case, for example, when the power is turned off during a game by the player and the power is turned off after that, the player confirms the display contents on the image display unit 114 until the predetermined image is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to recognize whether or not a hold has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a hold has not occurred even though a hold has occurred.

It should be noted that, for example, when the variable effect is being executed and no suspension has occurred, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled, in addition to the returning image 62 , an image consisting of text such as "No hold has occurred" may be displayed. That is, when the power-off state of the pachinko game machine 100 is canceled while the variable performance is being executed and the suspension is not occurring, when the variable performance is not being executed and the suspension is not occurring. An image display different from the case where the power-off state of the pachinko game machine 100 is canceled immediately and the case where the power-off state of the pachinko game machine 100 is canceled while the variable performance is being executed and the suspension is occurring. It may be the display content in the unit 114 .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power-off state when the suspension is stored in the RAM 203, the effect control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 203 in the power-off state. After the number of reserved images 52 corresponding to the number is displayed on the image display unit 114, the number of reserved images 52 is reduced as the displayed reserved images 52 are moved and displayed.

In this case, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 after the power-off state is canceled matches the number of pending images that the player has recognized as the number of pending items immediately before the power-off state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity about the number of pending games when restarting the game after the power-off state is resolved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the decoration pattern 41 on the image display unit 114 when the pachinko game machine 100 recovers from the power-off state while the game control unit 200 stores a hold. When the variable image 51 is not displayed, the pending image 52 is displayed according to the signal transmitted from the game control unit 200, and the variable image 51 is displayed along with the movement display of the displayed pending image 52. - 特許庁The game control unit 200 can be regarded as main control means for controlling the progress of the game. Also, the effect control unit 300 can be regarded as a sub-control means that controls the effect. Also, the variable image 51 can be regarded as an execution image suggesting the content of the information regarding the determination related to the variable display being executed.
In this case, after the power-off state is resolved, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity about the number of reservations, and to make it easier to understand the timing of the start of the next fluctuation. It is possible to suppress feeling uncomfortable about the state.

In addition, in the variation effect example 4, when the non-initialization return is performed and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the light emitting unit 137 is extinguished (see FIG. 65-2 (7)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the light emitting part 137 may blink when the non-initialization return is performed and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In other words, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 137 may be different between immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and when the non-initialization return is performed.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, it has been explained that the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed when the non-initialization return is performed after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. , but not limited to.
For example, when the menu display explanation image 63 is displayed, when the variable effect is being performed, when the jackpot game is being performed, when the customer waiting effect is being performed, the power supply at the time of restoration A command for controlling insertion may be transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 . In this case, the effect control section 300 may restrict the display of the image being displayed on the image display section 114 and cause the returning image 62 to be displayed.

(Variation production example 5)
FIGS. 66-1 to 66-3 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-1 to 66-3.
It should be noted that FIGS. 66-1 to 66-3 are variable effects executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. That is, this example 5 of variable performance is the same variable performance as example 2 of variable performance (see FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 66-1(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. More specifically, the third pending image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1(3), the number "351", which is the three decorative patterns 41, is determined and stopped. At this time, a chance eye display effect is executed. More specifically, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole are displayed in blue by executing the chance eye display effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1(4), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 66-1(5).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 5, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66-1(6), the image display unit 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81. FIG.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 66-1(7), the number "315" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed. Also, at this time, two pending images 52 are displayed. Here, the second pending image 52, that is, the pending image 52 (see FIG. 66-1 (4)) displayed in blue immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is displayed in white. . Also, at this time, the variation image 51 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (9), the next variation expectation effect is performed. In the next change expectation effect, a notice image 82 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (10), the number "412" which is the three decorative patterns 41 is determined and stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (11), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variation of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. More specifically, the display color of the variable image 51 changes from white to red due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (12), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (13), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (14), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (15), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the number "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (16), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 66-3 (17), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the display of the pending image 52 whose display mode has changed due to the change effect, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the display mode has changed. The display mode of the pending image 52 returns to the display mode before the change effect is performed. Also, while the pending image 52 is displayed, no change effect is performed, but when the pending image 52 is moved and displayed as the variable image 51, the change effect is performed.

For example, in the case of performing a notice effect of "change the display color of the pending image 52 to blue by the first change effect and change the display color of the variable image 51 to red by the second change effect", the power supply is turned off. Information about the display color of the pending image 52 at the time may not be stored in the RAM 303 . In this case, the effect control part 300 cannot recognize whether the holding image 52 to be the target of the notice effect was displayed in white or blue immediately before the power-off state after the power-off state was resolved. Then, for example, although the pending image 52 was displayed in white immediately before the power-off state, if the pending image 52 is displayed in blue after the power-off state is resolved, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the pending image 52 is displayed in the display mode before the change effect is performed, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the pending image 52 is moved and displayed as the variable image 51, an advance notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the RAM 303, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red. This suppresses the decline in the player's interest due to the fact that the previous notice effect is not performed.
It should be noted that after the power-off state is resolved, the change effect for the variable image 51 may not be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off at the stage where the first of the three chance eye display effects is performed, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the second and subsequent times are performed. The next change expectation performance is performed without performing the chance eye display performance. In other words, when the Pachinko game machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the notice performance and then non-initialization return is performed, the notice performance that was supposed to be executed is not continued. Then, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from the notice effect that was supposed to be executed.

For example, in the case where the advance notice effect of "three times of chance display effects" is performed, the RAM 303 may not store information about the number of times the chance display effect has been executed in the power-off state. In this case, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect control section 300 cannot recognize the number of times the chance eye display effect has been executed immediately before the power-off state. Then, for example, even though the chance eye display effect was performed once immediately before the power cutoff state, if the chance eye display effect is performed three more times after the power cutoff state is resolved, the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the notice effect that should have been executed is not continued, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Further, based on the information stored in the RAM 303 to "execute the notice effect", the notice effect different from the notice effect that should have been executed is performed, so that the notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not performed. This suppresses the decrease in interest of the player due to this.

(Variation production example 6)
FIGS. 67-1 and 67-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67-1 and 67-2.
It should be noted that FIGS. 67-1 and 67-2 show variable effects executed when "EB9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. In other words, the variable effect example 6 is the same variable effect as the variable effect example 3 (see FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 67-1(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the type of the stage image 61 is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, as shown in FIG. 67-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-1(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "6", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 67-1(4). Also, at this time, sound is not output from the speaker 156 .
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 6, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67-1(5), the image display unit 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81. FIG. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbols stop changing.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 67-1(6), the number "222" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. The combination "222" of the numbers of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. Also, “222” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "222". In addition, the decoration pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 have the same fixed stop timing, so that the time from the start of the display to the fixed stop is the same. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 is displayed. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-1(7), the image display section 114 displays the opening image 70 and the right-handed image 71. FIG. At this time, BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 67-1(8), when the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays the in-round image 72, the song selection image 73, the round number image 74, and the number of points. An image 75 and a winning eye image 88 are displayed. In the in-round image 72, the character, which is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100, has its right hand lowered. In the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Also, in the point number image 75, the text "50pt" is displayed. Also, in the winning eye image 88, the number "2" is displayed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (9), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "150pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 67-2 (10). At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67-2(11), the image display unit 114 displays the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning hitting right image 83. FIG. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-2(12), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71, a rounding image 72, a round number image 74, and a point number image 75. FIG. At this time, in the in-round image 72, a character different from the character displayed before execution of the high-precision fan effect (see FIG. 67-1 (8)) lowers its right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content of the moving image in the round-in-progress image 72 changes from the display content before execution of the high-precision fan effect. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "200pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, the high-precision notification effect is not executed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM that was playing at the start of the jackpot game (see (8) in FIG. 67-1) is output again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (13), in the in-round image 72, the character in the in-round image 72 (see FIG. 67-2 (12)) displayed during "Round 2" is mentioned. That is, the display contents of the in-round image 72 change as the jackpot game progresses. At this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "750pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . It should be noted that the character selection image 79 is not displayed in this jackpot game. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high probability start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 67-2 (14). At this time, BGM corresponding to the high-accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (15), the decorative pattern 41 (“315”) with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114 . The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time is the sequence of numbers "222" (Fig. reference). And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (16), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 does not turn off during the execution of the variable performance determined to perform the jackpot game, the performance control unit 300 performs the next variation of the variable performance being executed. The decorative pattern 41 for starting the production is displayed by a predetermined pattern arrangement, and when the pachinko game machine 100 returns after the power is cut off during the execution of the variable production determined to perform the special game, it is being executed. The decorative pattern 41 for starting the next variable performance of the variable performance of 1 is displayed in a row including different patterns.

For example, when the power supply is cut off, there is a case where the RAM 303 does not store information regarding which combination of numbers of the decorative symbols 41 should be displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, the types of jackpot symbols (see FIG. 21) included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 do not correspond to all types of the decorative symbols 41 . Therefore, when the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize which combination of numbers of the decorative pattern 41 was to be displayed before the power-off state. In this case, at the start of the "next variation" of the variation in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, for example, a combination of decorative symbols 41 different from the combination of decorative symbols 41 to be displayed before the power-off state is displayed. If the decorative symbols 41 are displayed side by side, the player may misunderstand that he or she has won the jackpot in this "next variation". Therefore, at the start of the "next fluctuation", the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a row including different patterns, thereby preventing the player from misunderstanding that he has won the jackpot in the "next fluctuation". , the player is restrained from having a sense of incompatibility when restarting the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 does not turn off during execution of the jackpot game, the effect control unit 300 displays a special effect image on the image display unit 114 during execution of the jackpot game. When the Pachinko game machine 100 is restored after being turned off during execution of the game, an image different from the special performance image is displayed without displaying the special performance image during execution of the jackpot game. The special effect images include, for example, a round in progress image 72, a song selection image 73, a round number image 74, a point number image 75, a high probability swaying image 76, a high probability notification image 77, a character selection image 79, and a high probability start image 80. , winning image 88, and the like.

For example, when a power failure occurs during execution of a jackpot game, the RAM 303 may not store information relating to the progress of the performance in the jackpot game during the power failure. Therefore, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize the progress of the effect during the jackpot game when the power-off state is resolved. In this case, if the effect image that should be displayed when the pachinko game machine 100 does not turn off is displayed when it is not suitable for the progress of the effect during the jackpot game, the player feels uncomfortable. might give. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect image that should be displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 does not enter the power-off state is not displayed, so that when the player restarts the game It suppresses feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns to the power-off state during the execution of the variable effect when it is determined that the jackpot game is performed, the variable effect being executed The variable performance being executed is terminated without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 related to the above.

When the pachinko game machine 100 enters a power-off state during execution of a game by a player, since the performance is temporarily interrupted, the performance related to the fluctuation performed immediately before the power-off state is performed even after the power-off state is resolved. This makes it easier for the player to feel uncomfortable with the performance. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the player can enjoy the game by limiting the pseudo-effect using the decorative pattern 41 related to the variation that was performed immediately before the power-off state. It suppresses feeling of discomfort when resuming.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled during execution of a jackpot game, the round number image 74 and the point number image 75 are displayed. In addition, the display contents in the number-of-rounds image 74 at this time correspond to the state of progress of the jackpot game. In addition, the display content in the point number image 75 corresponds to the number of winning balls due to winning of the game balls in the big winning opening 125 .

In this embodiment, the RAM 303 stores information about the progress of the round each time the round in the jackpot game progresses. In addition, each time a game ball wins in the big winning hole 125, the RAM 303 stores information about the number of winning balls. Therefore, even if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 300, based on the information stored in the RAM303, the number of rounds image 74 and the number of points The image 75 is displayed in a display mode according to the situation of the jackpot game. In this case, even if the power-off state occurs, the player can be made aware of the state of the big winning game after the power-off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 100 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled during the execution of the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the power-off state is entered. The previously displayed stage image 61 is displayed again, but no sound is output from the speaker 156 at this time.

If a sound is output after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state, the player may feel that a warning sound has been output, which may make the player uneasy. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed when the power-off state is resolved, thereby making the player aware that the content displayed on the image display unit 114 has returned to the state before the power-off state. This prevents the player from feeling uneasy about the occurrence of the disconnection state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state during execution of a jackpot game, and the power-off state is canceled, before the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed, that is, , before returning from the power-off state, an effect is performed to prompt the player to play.

When the power-off state is canceled, before the performance by the performance control unit 300 is started, the control of the jackpot game by the game control unit 200 may be started. In this case, if the player does not restart the game even though the jackpot game is being played, the player may be disadvantaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power-off state is resolved, the player is prompted to play before the effect performed before the power-off state is restored, thereby disadvantageous to the player. It suppresses the occurrence of

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state during execution of a jackpot game and the power-off state is canceled, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the beginning. In this case, the player can recognize that a jackpot game is being played by listening to the BGM that is output after the power-off state is resolved.

In addition, after the power-off state is canceled, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game may not be output from the beginning. For example, it is possible to output from a predetermined portion of BGM, such as the chorus of a piece of music, every time a power-off state occurs and then is resolved. That is, it is sufficient that the BGM is output from the same location each time the power-off state occurs and then is resolved.

(Modified example of variation effect example 6)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a modification of example 6 of variable effect.
In the variable effect example 6, the effect performed when the power-off state occurs and the power-off state is resolved during the variable effect has been described, but the effect performed when the power-off state is resolved is not limited to these. .
Below, a modification of the variation effect example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. That is, the special symbols start to fluctuate, and after entering the ready-to-win state, the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters the power-off state, and non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68(1), a returning image 62 and a game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 . After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbols stop changing.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 68(2), the number "315" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, “315” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "315". At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 68(3), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right hand shot. An instruction image 87 is displayed. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the big win notification image 84, which is BGM corresponding to the big win game, is output from the speaker 156. - 特許庁That is, the BGM output from the speaker 156 at this time is different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 64-2 (11)) which is performed after the change in which the power failure does not occur.
It should be noted that none of the opening image 70, in-round image 72, music selection image 73, round number image 74, point number image 75, character selection image 79, and high accuracy start image 80 are displayed during the jackpot game. . In addition, in this jackpot game, high-precision fanning production and high-precision notification production are not performed.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during execution of the jackpot game, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 68(4). Also, at this time, sound is no longer output from the speaker 156 .
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68(5), the image display section 114 displays a return-in-progress image 62, a game continuation instruction image 81, and a return-in-progress hitting right image 83. FIG. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(6), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87. . At this time, the BGM corresponding to the big win game, which corresponds to the big win notification image 84, is output from the speaker 156 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM output at the start of the jackpot game (see (3) in FIG. 68) is output again. Thereafter, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the jackpot game ends. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out according to the winning to the big winning opening 125 during the big winning game.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 68(8), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

As described above, in this modified example, during the execution of the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state, and when the power-off state is canceled, this special symbol is stopped, three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a row containing different patterns.

For example, when the power supply is cut off, there is a case where the RAM 303 does not store information regarding which combination of numbers of the decorative symbols 41 should be displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Also, the types of jackpot symbols (see FIG. 21) included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 do not correspond to all types of the decorative symbols 41 . Therefore, when the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize which combination of numbers of the decorative pattern 41 was to be displayed before the power-off state. In this case, when the variation of the special symbols whose lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is stopped, for example, a sequence of numbers different from the combination of the decorative symbols 41 which were to be displayed before the power was turned off. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot in ``variation different'' from the variation of the special pattern that is the jackpot. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped, three decoration patterns 41 including different patterns are displayed to prevent the player from misunderstanding that he has won a jackpot in 'different fluctuations'.

In addition, in this modification, when the pachinko game machine 100 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled during execution of a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is being executed. , images such as a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87, which are not displayed when the power is not turned off, are displayed.

In the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, and the variation performance related to the fluctuation of the special pattern may be performed according to the type of the decorative patterns 41 that are arranged. Therefore, when the performance control unit 300 cannot recognize which combination of decorative patterns 41 is to be displayed when the power-off state is resolved, the type of performance to be performed in the subsequent jackpot game may also not be recognized. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game after the power-off state is canceled, an image different from that when the power-off state does not occur is displayed, so that the jackpot game after the power-off state occurs is displayed. To suppress giving a sense of incompatibility to a player in a game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as in the variation effect example 6 and the modification, during the variation of the special symbols, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state, and when the power-off state is canceled, the special symbols change. The time for displaying the three decorative patterns 41 is shortened compared to the case where the power failure state does not occur inside. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when viewing the three decorative symbols 41 displayed after the power-off state is resolved.

In addition, in the variable effect example 6 and the modified example, the big win game may be performed without displaying the three decorative symbols 41 after the power-off state is resolved. Shortening the display time of the three decorative patterns 41 includes not displaying the three decorative patterns 41 (0 second). Also, in this case, the small pattern 56 may be stopped. That is, after the power-off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 are not displayed, but the small symbols 56 are displayed, and then the jackpot game may be performed.

In addition, in the modified example, it was explained that in the jackpot game, a BGM different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 64-2 (11)) that is performed after a change that does not cause a power-off state is output. , but not limited to. In other words, the same BGM may be output in the big win game regardless of whether or not the power supply is interrupted during the fluctuation of the special symbols in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is the big win or in the big win game.

Further, in the variable effect example 6 and the modified example, the decorative pattern 41 to be fixed and stopped after the power-off state is resolved is the highly decorative decorative pattern 41, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, after the power-off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. Even in this case, the decorative pattern 41 is not temporarily stopped after the power-off state is resolved.

(Modified example 1 of production in jackpot game)
FIG. 69-1 and FIG. 69-2 are diagrams showing an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like, which is a modification example of the effect in the jackpot game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69-1 and 69-2, a modified example (modified example 1) of the effect in the jackpot game will be described. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 69-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed image 71, a rounding image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, a point A number image 75 and a winning eye image 88 are displayed. In the in-round image 72, the character, which is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100, has its right hand lowered. In the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Also, in the point number image 75, the text "50pt" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69-1(2), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "150pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 .

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 69-1(3).
Then, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. A hitting right image 83 during recovery is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69-1(5), the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71, a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a point number image 75, and a winning image 88. be. On the other hand, the round number image 74 is not displayed. Also, at this time, in the in-round image 72, the character that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering its right hand. In other words, the display content in the in-round image 72 is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 69-1 (1)). Also, at this time, the point number image 75 displays the text “0pt”. It should be noted that, for example, after this, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole 125 , the number of prize balls resulting from the winning is displayed in the point number image 75 . That is, in the point number image 75, the number of winning balls after recovery from the power-off state is displayed. Also, at this time, a character “?” is displayed in the winning eye image 88 .

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 69-1(6).
Then, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. A hitting right image 83 during recovery is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69-1(8), the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed image 71, a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a point number image 75, and a winning image 88. be. Also, at this time, in the in-round image 72, the character that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering its right hand. In other words, the display content in the in-round image 72 is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 69-1 (1)). Also, at this time, the point number image 75 displays the text “0pt”.
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high probability start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69-2(9).

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 69-2 (10), the decorative pattern 41 (“315”) with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114 . And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 69-2 (11), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

As described above, in Modification 1, when the power-off state occurs during execution of the jackpot game and the power-off state is resolved, the round number image 74 is not displayed thereafter. In this case, when the power-off state is resolved, the player misunderstands the progress of the jackpot game by displaying the round number image 74 even though the performance control unit 300 does not recognize the progress of the jackpot game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 2 of production in jackpot game)
FIGS. 70-1 and 70-2 are diagrams showing other modifications of the effects in the jackpot game performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70-1 and 70-2, another modified example (modified example 2) of the effect in the jackpot game will be described. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. A number image 75 and a winning eye image 88 are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70-1(2), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 70-1(3).
Then, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. A hitting right image 83 during recovery is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70-1(5), the image display section 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87. be done. Note that the round number image 74, the point number image 75, the winning eye image 88, and the like are not displayed.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 70-1 (6).
Then, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. A hitting right image 83 during recovery is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70-1(8), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87. be done.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. ing. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 70-2 (10), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Non-initialization test operation processing at the time of malfunction of the movable accessory)
FIGS. 71-1 and 71-2 are diagrams showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions.
Next, an example of non-initialization test operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 71-1 and 71-2. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 71-1(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1(4), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (5), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1(6), an operation presentation is performed. In the operation effect, a button operation image 89 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the production button 161 while the button operation image 89 is being displayed, a role product action production is performed as shown in FIG. 71-1(7). In the role product action presentation, the left movable role product 115A, the middle movable role product 115B, and the right movable role product 115C operate so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 71-1(8). Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C cover part of the image display section 114 and stop moving.

Next, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B return to the positions before the accessory action presentation is performed. On the other hand, the right movable accessory 115C has a malfunction and does not return to the position before the performance of the accessory action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71-2 (10), non-initialization test operation processing is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B operate so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. On the other hand, the right movable accessory 115C maintains a non-operating state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71-2 (11), the non-initialization test operation processing by the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B is completed. On the other hand, the right movable accessory 115C maintains a state of partially covering the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a reserved number display 55, and a small pattern 56 are displayed.

(Modification 1 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modification of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions.
Next, another example (modified example 1) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 71-1(1) to 71-1(5) are performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and the ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(1), an operation presentation is performed. In the operation effect, a button operation image 89 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the production button 161 while the button operation image 89 is being displayed, a role product action production is performed as shown in FIG. 72(2). In this accessory action presentation, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C move to the front side of the image display section 114. FIG.
Subsequently, in the performance of the action of the accessory, as shown in FIG. 72(3), the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C each move to the right.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 72(4). Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C cover part of the image display section 114 and stop moving.

When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the image display section 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 as shown in FIG. 72(5). . Also, at this time, the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C return to the positions before the accessory action presentation is performed. On the other hand, the left movable accessory 115A is malfunctioning and does not return to the position before the accessory action effect is performed. The position of the left movable accessory 115A at this time is the position where the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B come into contact when the middle movable accessory 115B performs the non-initialization test operation process. be.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 72(6), none of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C perform the operation by the non-initialization test operation process. In addition, the left movable accessory 115A maintains a state in which a part of the image display section 114 is covered. Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a reserved number display 55, and a small pattern 56 are displayed.

Thus, in Modification 1, when a power failure occurs during operation of the movable accessory 115 (when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions), the abnormality of the movable accessory 115 continues even after the power failure is resolved. If one movable accessory 115 and another movable accessory 115 come into contact with each other during the non-initialization test operation process, the motion of any movable accessory 115 is restricted.
In this case, secondary damage due to contact between one movable accessory 115 and another movable accessory 115 can be suppressed by performing non-initialization test operation processing after the power-off state is resolved. can.

(Modification 2 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing another modification of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions.
Next, another example (modified example 2) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 72(1) to 72(3) are performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and then the performance of the action of the role product is performed. When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 73(1). Also, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C cover part of the image display section 114 and stop moving.

When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 73(2). . Also, at this time, the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C return to the positions before the accessory action presentation is performed. On the other hand, the left movable accessory 115A is malfunctioning and does not return to the position before the accessory action effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(3), non-initialization test operation processing is performed. In this case, the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C operate to cover a part of the image display section 114, respectively. On the other hand, the left movable accessory 115A does not operate by the non-initialization test operation process. Also, at this time, the middle movable accessory 115B comes into contact with the left movable accessory 115A, thereby hindering the operation of the middle movable accessory 115B by the non-initialization test operation process.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(4), the non-initialization test operation processing by the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C is completed. On the other hand, the left movable accessory 115A maintains a state of partially covering the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a reserved number display 55, and a small pattern 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the modification 2, when the power failure occurs during the operation of the movable accessory 115 (when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions), the abnormality of the movable accessory 115 continues even after the power failure is resolved. Even if one movable accessory 115 and another movable accessory 115 come into contact when the non-initialization test operation process is performed, the movable accessory 115 positioned at the initial position is not Execute the operation by the initialization test processing.
In this case, when another movable accessory 115 contacts the one movable accessory 115 in which the abnormality continues, the abnormality in the one movable accessory 115 in which the abnormality continues can be eliminated. be.

In the above description, the operation example when the non-initialization test operation process is performed has been described with reference to FIGS. 71-1, 71-2, 72, and 73. Even when the modification test operation process is performed, the same operation as the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 71-1, 71-2, 72, and 73 may be performed.

In addition, in the operation example of the non-initialization test operation process, if the malfunction of the movable accessory 115 occurs after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the speaker 156 issues an alarm that the malfunction has occurred. Alternatively, the image display unit 114 may display a warning image indicating that a malfunction has occurred.

(Variation production example 7)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
In addition, the variable performance shown in FIG. 74 is a variable performance executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. there is
Then, as shown in FIG. 74(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 74(3).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 7, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74(4), the image display section 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81. FIG. Also, at this time, the background on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is the case where the non-initialization return is performed after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the fluctuation performance of the low probability time saving non-game state (Fig. 67 -1 (5)) is displayed in a different color. In the illustrated example, the background color on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is displayed in blue. Further, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays the hitting-right-in-return image 83 .

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 74(5), the number "315", which is the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness, is fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 stop along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “315” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "1". Also, at this time, the variation image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(6), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Also, at this time, the first reserved image 52 is moved to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "0".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display content of the image display unit 114 when the non-initialization return is performed differs between the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the variation effect example 7, when the non-initialization return is performed, it is explained that the image 62 during return and the hitting right image 83 during return (see FIG. 74 (4)) are displayed, but this is not the case. not. As an image displayed together with the returning image 62, for example, a right hitting image 71 (see FIG. 74(5)) may be displayed.

(Event when the signal line is disconnected)
FIG. 75 is a diagram explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected.
Next, referring to FIG. 75, what happens when the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected will be described. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by signal lines via connectors.

The fraud detection control board is a board for controlling the detection of fraud in games by players. Radio wave detection means, magnetic detection means, and vibration detection means are connected to the fraud detection control board.
The radio wave detection means detects abnormal radio waves. For example, when detecting a radio wave having a power density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the radio wave detection means notifies the game control board of the detection of an abnormal radio wave through a signal line.
The magnetic detection means detects abnormal magnetism. For example, when the magnetism detection means detects magnetism having a magnetic flux density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it notifies the game control board of the detection of abnormal magnetism via a signal line.
The vibration detection means detects abnormal vibrations. The vibration detection means, for example, when detecting a vibration consisting of an acceleration equal to or greater than a predetermined value, notifies the game control board that an abnormal vibration has been detected via a signal line.

The game control unit 200 configured in the game control board, when receiving a notice of abnormality from the fraud detection control board, reports an error corresponding to the type of the received notice.
Also, the game control board is provided with a connection detection sensor. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of connection between the game control board and the fraud detection control board.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 75(3), the connector that connects the game control board and the fraud detection control board is disconnected, and thereby the game control board and the fraud detection control board are disconnected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the game control board detects disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the fraud detection control board. When the disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the fraud detection control board is detected, the game control unit 200 causes the image display unit 114 to display the radio wave error notification image 90 and the magnetic error notification image 91. , and the vibration error notification image 92 are displayed. In addition, the speaker 156 terminates the output of the BGM corresponding to the variation effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a radio wave error has occurred, a notification sound indicating that a magnetic error has occurred, and a notification sound that a vibration error has occurred. Let

The radio wave error notification image 90 is an image that notifies or suggests that a radio wave error has occurred. This radio wave error notification image 90 is an image displayed when the game control unit 200 receives a notification of detection of abnormal radio waves from the radio wave detection means.
The magnetic error notification image 91 is an image that notifies or suggests that a magnetic error has occurred. This magnetic error notification image 91 is an image displayed when the game control unit 200 receives notification of detection of abnormal magnetism from the magnetism detection means.
The vibration error notification image 92 is an image that notifies or suggests that a vibration error has occurred. This vibration error notification image 92 is an image displayed when the game control section 200 receives notification of detection of abnormal vibration from the vibration detection means.

After that, when the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected again by connecting the connector to the signal line, the radio error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification The image 92 may be hidden, the error notification sound may be stopped, and the decorative pattern 41 and the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected again, the radio error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification image 92 are displayed, and the error notification sound is output. may be continued.

(Event 2 when the signal line is disconnected)
FIG. 76 is a diagram explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected.
Next, referring to FIG. 76, an event (event 2) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected will be described. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the game control board and the effect control board are connected by the signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the effect control board are connected by signal lines via connectors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (3), the connector that connects the game control board and the performance control board is removed, and thereby the game control board and the performance control board are not connected. Even in this case, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be displayed on the image display section 114 . More specifically, three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, various errors are not notified. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76(4), by connecting the connector to the signal line, the game control board and the performance control board are connected again. Even in this case, various errors are not notified. Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, the numbers "421", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

(Event 3 when the signal line is disconnected)
FIG. 77 is a diagram explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected.
Next, referring to FIG. 77, an event (event 3) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected will be described. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77(1), the effect control section 300 stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the game control board and the switch are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the switch are connected by signal lines via connectors. This switch may be, for example, the first trigger switch 211 . Also, the switch may be the second starting switch 122 or the gate switch 214 .
Also, the game control board is provided with a connection detection sensor. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of connection between the game control board and the switch.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77(3), the connector that connects the game control board and the switch is disconnected, and the game control board and the switch are disconnected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the game control board detects disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch. Then, when disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch is detected, the game control section 200 causes the image display section 114 to display the disconnection error notification image 93 . In addition, the speaker 156 terminates the output of the BGM corresponding to the variable effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a disconnection error has occurred.
The disconnection error notification image 93 is an image that notifies or suggests that an error related to disconnection of the signal line has occurred.

After that, when the game control board and the switch are connected again by connecting the connector to the signal line, the disconnection error notification image 93 is hidden and the disconnection error notification sound is output. It may disappear and the decorative pattern 41 and the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the game control board and the switch are connected again, the display of the disconnection error notification image 93 and the output of the disconnection error notification sound may be continued.
Further, the image displayed when disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch is detected is not limited to the disconnection error notification image 93 . When disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the first starting port switch 211 is detected, an image notifying an error of the first starting port switch 211 may be displayed. In other words, according to the type of switch, an image notifying of an error of the switch for which disconnection has been detected may be displayed. In other words, if disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch is detected, at least one of the connection error and the connection destination error should be notified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the output of a predetermined effect sound, if disconnection of the predetermined signal line connected to the game control means is detected, the effect sound being output is terminated and a predetermined notification Sound can be output.
In this case, even if a predetermined effect sound is being output, the predetermined notification sound can be given priority over the effect sound.

In addition, in the event explained with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, the case where the decorative pattern 41 is changing has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even during execution of a customer waiting effect, a jackpot game, etc., if the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected, the same event as described with reference to FIGS. An event may occur.

In addition, although the description is omitted, in each variation effect example and its modification example, and in the operation example and its modification example in the non-initialization return process, after the power failure state is resolved, FIG. 59-1, FIG. The non-initialization return processing and the non-initialization test operation processing described with reference to FIGS. 71-1, 71-2, 72, and 73 may be performed.

Also, in the present embodiment, an example in which light is emitted in the normal light emission mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the normal light emission mode may be a mode in which no light is emitted. That is, the normal light emission mode includes a mode in which no light is emitted.

Also, the movable accessory 115 may be provided on the frame member 150 or may be provided on the game board 110 . In other words, the movable accessory 115 can be regarded as a first light-emitting portion capable of emitting light, and can also be regarded as a second light-emitting portion capable of emitting light.

Various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, but it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various processing examples, variable production examples, and modifications have been mentioned, this document does not refer to applying or combining the contents of such processing examples, variable production examples, and modifications to other productions. It is possible even if In addition, it is possible to combine various processing examples, variation rendering examples, and modification examples, and to replace some of them, even if there is no mention in this document.

[Technical features of the present invention]
◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information about the game, and production control means (for example, Effect control unit 300) and, in the game machine, the power supply cut state of the game machine (for example, the state of FIG. 59-1 (2)) to return from the storage means (for example, RAM203) First return with initialization of stored information (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) and second return without the initialization (for example, in FIG. 59-2 (5) There is a non-initialization return), and the effect control means (for example, effect control unit 300) is, when the first return (for example, initialization return of FIG. 60-2 (5)) is performed, the second The effect means (eg, the frame lamp 157 ) is operated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ The second configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information related to games, operation means (for example, effect button 161) operable by the player, and operable movable accessories. (For example, movable accessory 115) is a game machine comprising a production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that operates, and the game machine is in a power-off state (for example, in FIG. 59-1 (2) state) includes a first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. There is a second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)) without accompanying, and the production control means (for example, production control unit 300) is the first return (for example, FIG. 60- 2 (5) Initialization return) is performed, the operation means (eg, production button 161) and the movable accessory (eg, movable accessory 115) are set to the second recovery (eg, FIG. 59-2 (5) Non-initialization return) is operated by a special operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)), and the operation mode of the operation means (for example, the production button 161) is changed from the special operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 60-2 (8)), the movable accessory (for example, the movable 60-2(5)) to the normal operation mode (eg, FIG. 60-2(8)). do.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game frame (eg, frame member 150) having a first light-emitting portion capable of emitting light (eg, frame lamp 157) and a second light-emitting portion capable of emitting light (eg, A gaming machine comprising a game board (for example, a game board 110) having a board lamp 116) and forming a game area (for example, a game area 111), and a storage means (for example, a RAM 203) for storing information about a game. 59-1 (2)), the first step accompanying initialization of information stored in the storage means (eg, RAM 203) is performed. There are a return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) and a second return without the initialization (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)). When restoration (for example, initialization restoration in FIG. 60-2 (5)) is performed, the first light emitting unit (for example, frame lamp 157) and the second light emitting unit (for example, board lamp 116) Light is emitted in a special light emission mode (for example, the light emission mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) different from the case where 2 restoration (for example, non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2 (5)) is performed, and the first light emission When the light emission mode of the part (eg, the frame lamp 157) changes from the special light emission mode (eg, the light emission mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal light emission mode (the light emission mode of FIG. 60-2 (8)) , The light emission mode of the second light emitting part (eg, the board lamp 116) also changes from the special light emission mode (eg, the light emission mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal light emission mode (the light emission mode of FIG. 60-2 (8) ) is characterized by changing to
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information about games, and a plurality of movable parts (for example, left movable accessory 115A, middle movable accessory 115B, Right movable accessory 115C) is a game machine comprising a production control means (for example, production control unit 300) that operates, and the game machine is in a power-off state (for example, the state of FIG. 59-1 (2)) The return from the storage means (for example, the RAM 203) involves initializing the information stored in the first return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)), and the initialization involves the There is a second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)), and the production control means (for example, production control unit 300) controls the plurality of movable parts (for example, the left movable accessory 115A, middle movable accessory 115B, and right movable accessory 115C), at least one of the movable parts is subjected to the first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) and the second Moved in the same movement manner (for example, movement manner shown in FIG. For example, at least one of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C) is moved when the first return (eg, initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) is 60-2 (5)), depending on whether the second return (eg, the non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)) is performed. Characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◇ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information about games, and the gaming machine recovers from a power-off state (for example, the state of FIG. 59-1 (2)). display means for displaying a first image (e.g., stage image 61) and then displaying a second image (e.g., customer waiting image 65) different from the first image (e.g., stage image 61). For example, an image display unit 114), and the return is a first return accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203) (for example, FIG. 60 -2 (5) initialization return) and a second return without the initialization (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)), and the first return (for example, FIG. 60 -2(5) initialization return) is performed and the second return (for example, non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2(5)) is performed, the first image (for example, The time from when the stage image 61) is displayed to when the second image (for example, the customer waiting image 65) is displayed (for example, the total time of time T1, time T2, time T3, and time T4 in FIG. 61) , time T6, time T8, time T9, and time T10) are different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) stores information about the game and a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) that determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition. A gaming machine comprising storage means (eg, RAM 203), wherein the storage means (eg, RAM 203) stores the information regarding the determination as reserved storage, and stores the information regarding the determination as a reserve storage, and -1 (2) state) includes a first return accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203) (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-1 (4) ), and a second return (for example, the There is a non-initialization return), and the first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-1 (4)) is performed, and the second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. In the case where the initialization reset) is performed, the display means (for example, the image display section 114) from the restoration until the predetermined image (for example, the decorative pattern 41) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display section 114) ) (for example, the display content of FIG. 60-1 (4) and the display content of FIG. 65-2 (5)) are different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition, and holds information regarding the determination. A game machine comprising a holding storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing, and when returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of FIG. A first return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 59-1 (4)) when the reserved storage is not stored in (for example, RAM 203), and the reserved storage means (for example, RAM 203) There is a second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 65-2 (5)) that is the return when the reserved storage is stored in the first return (for example, the first return (for example, FIG. 59-1 ( 4) non-initialization return) is performed and the second return (for example, non-initialization return of FIG. 65-2(5)) is performed, the display means (for example, Display contents (for example, display contents of FIG. 59-1 (4) and FIG. 65 -2 (5) display content) is different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition, and holds information regarding the determination. A gaming machine comprising a holding storage means (for example, RAM 203) capable of storing a predetermined number of memories and an effect control means (for example, effect control section 300) for performing an effect, wherein the effect control means (for example, effect The control unit 300), when the game machine returns from the power-off state (eg, the state of FIG. The number of pending images (eg, the 65-2 (7) pending image 52) is displayed on the display means (eg, image display unit 114), and then the displayed pending image (eg, pending image 52) is moved and displayed (eg, FIG. 65-2 The display of (8)) is characterized in that the number of the pending images (for example, the pending images 52) is reduced.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes main control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, game control section 200). Accordingly, a sub-control means (for example, production control unit 300) for controlling the production, and the main control means (for example, game control unit 200) is based on establishment of the starting condition , It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game, it is possible to store a predetermined number of information related to the determination as a reserved storage, and the sub control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) is the main control means (for example, The number of pending images (eg, pending images 52) corresponding to the number of the pending memories stored in the game control unit 200) can be displayed on the display means (eg, the image display unit 114), and the result of the determination during the variable display of the pattern (for example, decorative pattern 41) according to the display means (for example, image display unit 114), and when the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200) stores the reservation memory, the gaming machine is in a power-off state (for example, in FIG. 65-1 (4) state), the execution image ( For example, the change image 51) is not displayed, and the holding image (for example, the holding image 52) is displayed in response to the signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200), and the holding displayed It is characterized in that the execution image (eg, the variable image 51) is displayed along with the moving display (eg, the display of FIG. 65-2 (8)) of the image (eg, the pending image 52).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes determination means (eg, special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game in the game, and display means (eg, image A game machine comprising an effect control means (for example, effect control unit 300) that performs a variable effect that displays a plurality of symbols (for example, decorative pattern 41) on the display unit 114), and the effect control means (for example, , effect control unit 300), if the game machine does not turn off during the execution of the variable effect determined to perform the special game, the symbol (for example, The decorative pattern 41) is displayed by a predetermined pattern arrangement (for example, the arrangement of the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 64-3 (18)), and the gaming machine is operated during execution of the variable effect determined to perform the special game. When returning after the power is turned off (for example, the state of FIG. 67-1 (4)), the pattern (for example, decorative pattern 41) that starts the next variable effect of the variable effect being executed is a different pattern. It is characterized in that it is displayed by a row including (for example, a row of decorative patterns 41 in FIG. 67-2 (15)).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ The eleventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) is based on the establishment of the starting condition, determination means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game, depending on the result of the determination A gaming machine comprising a production control means (for example, production control section 300) for performing a production, wherein the production control means (for example, production control section 300) controls the gaming machine during execution of the special game If the power is not turned off, a special effect image (for example, high-precision notification image 77) is displayed on display means (for example, image display unit 114) during execution of the special game, and a gaming machine is displayed during execution of the special game. When the power is turned off (for example, the state of FIG. 67-2 (10)) and then returns, the special effect image (for example, the high accuracy notification image 77) is displayed during the execution of the special game. It is characterized by displaying an image (for example, hitting right during recovery image 83) different from the special effect image (for example, high accuracy notification image 77).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) is based on the establishment of the starting condition, determination means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game, depending on the result of the determination and a performance control means (for example, a performance control unit 300) that performs a variable performance to temporarily stop and then stop the variably displayed pattern (for example, the decorative pattern 41), wherein the performance Control means (for example, production control unit 300), the game machine is in a power-off state (for example, the state of FIG. 67-1 (4)) during the execution of the variable production when it is determined to perform the special game When returning after becoming, without temporarily stopping the pattern (for example, decorative pattern 41) related to the variable effect being executed, the variable effect being executed (for example, the variable effect of FIG. 67-1 (6) ) is terminated.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

41 ... Decorative pattern (an example of a pattern)
51... Variation image (an example of execution image)
52... Reserved image (an example of a reserved image)
61... Stage image (an example of the first image)
65... Customer waiting image (an example of the second image)
77... High accuracy notification image (an example of a special effect image)
100 Pachinko game machine (an example of a game machine)
110... Game board (an example of a game board)
111... Game area (an example of a game area)
114: Image display unit (an example of display means)
115 Movable accessories (an example of movable accessories)
115A... left movable accessory (an example of a movable part)
115B...Medium movable accessory (an example of a movable part)
115C... right movable accessory (an example of a movable part)
116... Board lamp (an example of the second light emitting part)
150... Frame member (an example of a game frame)
157 Frame lamp (an example of the first light-emitting part)
161...Production button (an example of operation means)
200... Game control section (an example of main control means)
203...RAM (an example of storage means)
234... Special symbol determination unit (an example of determination means)
300 ... Production control unit (an example of production control means)

Claims (1)

a storage means for storing determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition;
Production control means for operating production means for executing production,
display means for displaying a first image and then displaying a second image different from the first image when the gaming machine recovers from a power-off state, the gaming machine comprising:
The return includes a specific return involving initialization of information stored in the storage means,
both the first image and the second image are images that can be displayed before the gaming machine enters the power-off state;
The directing means is
a first effect means capable of emitting light while moving from the initial position to the effect position;
and a second effect means capable of outputting sound,
The production control means is
When the specific return is performed,
It is possible to perform an initial operation a first number of times to move the first effect means from the initial position to the effect position and to set the predetermined light emission mode,
The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to perform an initial notification for outputting a predetermined notification sound to the second effect means a second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times.

Images